703607
22
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/198
Next page
COMAND
Supplement
Order no. P463 0127 13 Part no. 463 584 52 04 Edition A-2017
É4635845204SËÍ
4635845204
COMAND Supplement
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Operator's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©
Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrae 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message in the
multimedia display.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected
by copyright
©
2005 The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
As at 29.02.2016
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
First of all, familiarize yourself with your multi-
media system. Read these operating instruc-
tions, particularly the safety and warning notes,
before you drive off.
This will help you to obtain the maximum pleas-
ure from your multimedia system and avoid
endangering yourself and others.
The equipment level and functions of your mul-
timedia system may differ depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
design
R
equipment
R
technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if
you have further questions.
The Operator's Manual and all supplements are
integral parts of the vehicle. You should always
keep it in the vehicle and pass it on to the new
owner if you sell the vehicle.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motor-
ing.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
4635845204
É4635845204SËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Introduction ......................................... 14
Operating safety .................................... 14
Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 15
Information on copyright .......................17
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 17
Overview and operation ..................... 18
Overview ................................................ 18
Touchpad ...............................................22
Basic functions ...................................... 27
Character entry (telephony) ................... 29
Character entry (navigation) .................. 30
Favorites ................................................ 31
System settings .................................. 34
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 34
Important safety notes .......................... 34
Display settings ..................................... 34
Time settings .........................................35
Text reader settings ...............................37
Voice Control System settings ............... 37
Wi-Fi ...................................................... 37
Bluetooth
®
settings ............................... 40
Setting the system language .................41
Calling up the favorite functions ............ 41
Importing/exporting data ...................... 42
Reset function .......................................43
Vehicle functions ................................ 44
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 44
Important safety notes .......................... 44
Vehicle settings ..................................... 44
Seats ..................................................... 46
360° camera ......................................... 47
Rear view camera .................................. 48
DYNAMIC SELECT .................................. 49
Driving dynamics ................................... 51
Navigation ........................................... 52
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 52
Introduction ........................................... 52
Basic settings ........................................ 54
Destination entry ................................... 56
Personal POIs and routes ...................... 67
Route guidance ...................................... 70
Real-time traffic reports ......................... 76
Storing destinations ............................... 80
Map functions ........................................ 82
Navigation functions .............................. 88
Problems with the navigation system .... 89
Telephone ............................................ 91
Your multimedia system equipment ...... 91
Important safety notes .......................... 91
General notes ........................................ 91
Telephone menu overview ..................... 92
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone .................................................... 92
Setting the reception and transmis-
sion volume ........................................... 96
Using the telephone .............................. 97
Mobile phone voice recognition ........... 100
Phone book ......................................... 101
Address book ...................................... 104
Importing contacts .............................. 109
Call lists ............................................... 111
Speed dial lists .................................... 112
Messages (text messages and e-
mails) ................................................... 113
Dictation function ................................ 119
Apple CarPlay™ ................................... 120
Android Auto™ .................................... 121
Online and Internet functions .......... 124
Your multimedia system equipment .... 124
Important safety notes ........................ 124
General notes ...................................... 124
Conditions for access .......................... 124
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada) .............................................. 125
Establishing/ending the connection .... 128
Mercedes-Benz Apps ........................... 128
Web browser ....................................... 129
Radio .................................................. 134
Your multimedia system equipment .... 134
Switching on the radio ......................... 134
Overview .............................................. 134
2
Contents
Setting the waveband .......................... 135
Station ................................................. 135
Tagging music tracks ........................... 137
Displaying station information ............. 137
Calling up sound settings .................... 137
Displaying information ......................... 137
Satellite radio ...................................... 137
Media ................................................. 143
Your multimedia system equipment .... 143
Activating media mode ........................ 143
Audio/video mode ............................... 144
Media search ....................................... 151
Bluetooth
®
audio mode ....................... 152
Operation with the Media Interface ..... 157
Video DVD mode ................................. 159
Picture viewer ...................................... 163
Sound ................................................. 165
Your multimedia system equipment .... 165
Sound settings ..................................... 165
Harman/Kardon
®
Logic 7
®
surround
sound system ...................................... 166
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound ................... 168
SIRIUS Weather ................................ 171
Your multimedia system equipment .... 171
Weather forecasts ............................... 171
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 179
Your multimedia system equipment .... 179
Overview .............................................. 179
Basic functions .................................... 183
System settings ................................... 185
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........... 185
Video DVD mode ................................. 189
Active COMAND media source mode .. 192
AUX mode ........................................... 194
Contents
3
1, 2, 3 ...
360° camera
Displaying images ............................ 47
Opening the camera cover for
cleaning (COMAND) .........................48
Settings ........................................... 48
A
Access data of the mobile phone
network provider
Deleting ......................................... 127
Editing ........................................... 127
Making entries ............................... 126
Selecting ........................................ 126
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 143
Adding bookmarks ............................ 130
Address book
Adding a new contact .................... 105
Adding information to a contact .... 106
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone .............................. 108
Browsing ........................................ 105
Calling up ....................................... 105
Changing the category of an entry .. 107
Changing the display and sorting
criteria for contacts ....................... 108
Deleting contacts ........................... 109
Deleting imported contacts ........... 110
Displaying contact details .............. 106
Editing a contact ............................ 107
Importing contacts ........................ 109
Introduction ................................... 104
Making a call ................................. 107
Receiving vCards ........................... 110
Saving a contact ............................ 109
Searching for a contact ................. 105
Sending e-mails ............................. 107
Sending text messages .................. 107
Starting route guidance ................. 106
Storing a phone number as a
speed dial number ......................... 107
Voice tags ...................................... 108
Address entry menu ............................ 56
Adjusting the volume
COMAND ......................................... 27
Traffic announcements .................... 27
Alternative Route ................................ 74
Ambient lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 44
Android Auto™
Activating voice control ................. 123
Calling up the sound settings ........ 122
Canceling the connection .............. 123
Establishing a connection .............. 122
Transmitted vehicle data ............... 123
Apple CarPlay™
Activating ....................................... 120
Changing the activation mode ....... 121
Connecting .................................... 120
Ending ............................................ 121
Requirements ................................ 120
Transmitted vehicle data ............... 121
Armrest
Adju
sting (
COMAND) ....................... 46
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Switching to (Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System) ................................ 186
Audio CD/MP3 mode
Switching to ................................... 143
Audio CDs
Saving ............................................ 150
Automatic time
Switching on/off .............................. 35
AUX jacks
CD/DVD drive ............................... 181
Avoiding an area .................................. 85
B
Back button ......................................... 21
Bang & Olufsen sound system
Balance/Fader ............................... 169
Calling up the sound menu ............ 168
Equalizer ........................................ 168
Features ........................................ 168
Sound profile ................................. 169
VIP selection .................................. 169
Blootooth
®
Connecting a different mobile
phone .............................................. 95
Bluetooth
®
Activating audio mode ................... 153
Activating/deactivating ................... 41
4
Index
Audio device mode and searching
for mobile phones .......................... 157
Basic display (audio mode) ............ 153
Connecting audio devices .............. 154
De-authorizing (de-registering) a
device ............................................ 157
Device list ...................................... 154
Displaying connection details .......... 96
Displaying details ........................... 155
Entering the passcode ..................... 94
External authorization (audio
device) ........................................... 154
Increasing the volume using
COMAND ....................................... 156
Interface .......................................... 91
Playback options ........................... 156
Preparation .................................... 152
Reconnecting an audio device ....... 156
Searching for a mobile phone .......... 93
Selecting a playback option ........... 156
Selecting a track ............................ 155
Starting and stopping playback ..... 155
Starting playback if the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device has been
stopped ......................................... 155
Telephony ........................................ 92
Telephony notes .............................. 91
Buttons and controller ........................ 21
C
Call lists
Displaying details ........................... 111
Opening and selecting an entry ..... 111
Saving an entry in the address
book .............................................. 111
Camera
360° camera (COMAND) ................. 47
Rear view camera ............................ 48
Car pool lanes ...................................... 56
Category list (music search) ............ 151
CD
Fast forward/fast rewind ............... 149
Inserting ........................................ 146
Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 147
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 186
Notes on discs ............................... 146
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 186
Selecting a track ............................ 149
CD mode
Playback options ........................... 148
Character entry
Phone book ...................................... 29
Characters
Entering (navigation) ........................ 30
Clear button ......................................... 21
Climate control
Ionization (COMAND) ....................... 45
COMAND
Active multicontour seat .................. 46
Basic functions ................................ 27
Components .................................... 18
Control panel ................................... 20
Controller ......................................... 21
Display ............................................. 19
Functions ......................................... 18
Multicontour seat ............................ 46
Seat functions .................................. 46
Switching on/off .............................. 27
COMAND display
Cleaning instructions ....................... 19
Setting ............................................. 34
Contacts
Deleting ......................................... 109
Importing .......................................109
Controller ............................................. 21
Cordless headphones
Changing batteries ........................ 183
Indicator lamp ................................ 182
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 181
Selecting the screen ......................182
D
Date format, setting ............................ 36
Day design, setting .............................34
Delayed switch-off
Interior lighting ................................ 45
Delayed switch-off time
Setting (COMAND) ...........................45
Destination
Saving to an SD card .......................80
Storing in the address book ............. 80
Index
5
Destination (navigation)
Entering a destination using the
map .................................................63
Entering a point of interest .............. 61
Entering using geo-coordinates ....... 66
Entering using Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 66
Keyword search ............................... 59
Saving .............................................. 80
Selecting an address book con-
tact as a destination ........................ 61
Selecting from the list of last des-
tinations ........................................... 60
Dialing a number (telephone) ............. 97
Display
Selecting the design ........................ 34
Switching on/off .............................. 35
Displaying energy consumption
and generated electrical energy
(COMAND) ............................................ 45
Driving Dynamics
Displaying ........................................ 51
DVD
Inserting/loading (DVD changer) ... 147
Inserting/loading (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 186
Notes on discs ............................... 146
Removing/ejecting (DVD
changer) ........................................ 147
Removing/ejecting (Rear Seat
Entertainment System) .................. 186
DVD video
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 189
DYNAMIC SELECT
Configuration via the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller ............................ 49
Configuring individual drive pro-
gram ................................................ 49
Configuring using the DYNAMIC
SELECT button ................................. 49
Displaying engine data ..................... 49
Setting options ................................ 50
E
E-mail
Answering ...................................... 117
Calling up the settings menu ......... 114
Changing the name of the e-mail
account .......................................... 114
Configuring an e-mail account ....... 114
Configuring the e-mails displayed .. 114
Deactivating the e-mail function .... 114
Deleting ......................................... 119
Displaying details ........................... 116
Downloading e-mails manually ...... 115
Editing text templates .................... 118
Forwarding ..................................... 118
Inbox .............................................. 115
Reading .......................................... 115
Settings ......................................... 114
Storing the sender as a new entry
in the address book ....................... 119
Using a phone number in the text .. 118
Using text templates ...................... 118
Writing ........................................... 117
Entering the address (example) ......... 57
Entering the city .................................. 57
F
Factory setting (reset function) ......... 43
Favorites
Adding ............................................. 32
Deleting ........................................... 32
Displaying and calling up ................. 31
Moving ............................................. 32
Overview .......................................... 31
Renaming ......................................... 32
Favorites (Internet) ........................... 132
Favorites button .................................. 41
Fuel consumption (COMAND) ............ 45
G
GPS reception ...................................... 52
Gracenote
®
Media Database ............ 150
H
Handwriting recognition
Switching text reader function
on/off .............................................. 25
Touchpad ......................................... 24
Harman kardon
®
Logic 7
®
sur-
round sound system
Balance/Fader ............................... 167
6
Index
Calling up the sound menu ............ 166
Equalizer ........................................ 167
Features ........................................ 166
Surround sound ............................. 167
Heading up (navigation) ..................... 82
Home address
Entering and saving ......................... 58
I
Incident (traffic report) ....................... 76
Intermediate destinations
Accepting for the route .................... 66
Creating ........................................... 64
Editing .............................................. 65
Entering ........................................... 64
Searching for a gas station when
the fuel level is low .......................... 66
Internet
Conditions for access .................... 124
Creating favorites .......................... 132
Entering the URL ............................ 129
Favorites manager ......................... 132
Favorites menu .............................. 132
Menu functions .............................. 130
Options menu ................................ 130
Selecting/setting access data ....... 125
Setting up an Internet connection .. 125
K
Keyword search (navigation)
Entering keywords ........................... 59
Online search ................................... 60
Selecting search options ................. 60
Selecting search results ................... 59
L
Lane recommendations
Explanation ...................................... 71
Presentation .................................... 71
Lights
Activating/deactivating the exte-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ......... 45
Setting the ambient lighting
(COMAND) ....................................... 44
List of access data
New provider ................................. 126
List of mobile phone network pro-
viders
With the selected provider ............. 126
Locator lighting
Setting (COMAND) ........................... 45
Lumbar support
Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 46
M
Making a call
Using speed dial .............................. 98
Using the call lists ............................ 97
Using the number keypad ................ 97
Using the phone book ...................... 97
Map
Selecting map content ..................... 82
Map (navigation)
Adjusting the scale .......................... 82
Building images ................................ 85
Displaying the next intersection ...... 84
Heading ........................................... 82
Map settings .................................... 82
Moving ............................................. 53
North orientation ............................. 82
Notes ............................................... 82
Rotating the 3D map ........................ 84
Selecting POI symbols on the
map ................................................. 83
Selecting text information on the
map ................................................. 83
Showing the map version ................. 84
Switching highway information
on/off .............................................. 84
Traffic Sign Assist ............................ 84
Updating .......................................... 87
Map functions ...................................... 82
Massage
Selecting a program ......................... 47
Media Interface
Basic display .................................. 157
Mode ............................................. 157
Playback options ........................... 159
Search ........................................... 158
Selecting a music file ..................... 158
Supported devices ......................... 157
Supported file formats ................... 158
Switching to Media Interface ......... 157
Index
7
Video function ............................... 159
Media mode
Bluetooth
®
Audio ........................... 152
Connections for external media
sources .......................................... 143
Media search
By folder ........................................ 152
Category list .................................. 151
Current track list ............................ 151
General notes ................................ 151
Keyword search .............................152
Music genres ................................. 152
Selecting by cover ......................... 152
Starting the media search .............. 151
Menu overview
CD audio and MP3 mode ...............146
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Calling up ....................................... 128
Voice-operated control system ...... 129
Microphone, switching on/off ........... 99
Mobile phone
Authorizing ....................................... 94
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) ................................................ 92
Connecting another mobile
phone .............................................. 95
De-authorizing ................................. 96
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details .............................................. 96
Enabling for Internet access .......... 125
MP3
Copyright ....................................... 146
Fast forward/fast rewind ...............149
Notes ............................................. 144
Safety notes .................................. 144
Stop and playback function ........... 149
N
Navigation
Adjusting the volume of the navi-
gation announcements .................... 27
Alternative route .............................. 74
Avoiding an area .............................. 85
Basic settings .................................. 54
Blocking a route section affected
by a traffic jam ................................. 75
Calling up the compass display ........ 88
Calling up the menu ......................... 88
Entering a destination ...................... 56
Entering a destination using the
map ................................................. 63
Entering a point of interest .............. 61
Entering characters (character
bar) .................................................. 30
GPS reception .................................. 52
Important safety notes .................... 52
Info on navigation ............................ 88
Lane recommendation ..................... 71
Off-road/Off-map (off-road desti-
nation) ............................................. 76
Online map display .......................... 88
Reading out traffic reports ............... 79
Repeating announcements .............. 73
Selecting a destination from the
list of last destinations ..................... 60
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 54
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 54
Showing/hiding the menu ............... 53
Starting route calculation ................ 58
Switching announcements
on/off .............................................. 73
Switching to ..................................... 53
Navigation announcements
Switching off .................................... 28
North orientation (navigation) ........... 82
O
Off-road ................................................ 76
Online and Internet functions
Calling up the device list ................ 127
Enabling a mobile phone for Inter-
net access ..................................... 125
Ending the connection ................... 128
Establishing a connection .............. 128
Manually setting the access data
of the mobile phone network pro-
vider .............................................. 126
Mercedes-Benz Apps ..................... 128
Selecting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider ..... 126
8
Index
Setting up an Internet connection .. 125
Web browser .................................. 129
P
Pause function
Video DVD ..................................... 163
Personal POIs and routes
Alert when approaching (personal
POI) .................................................. 67
Editing .............................................. 68
Importing via Mercedes-Benz
Apps ................................................ 68
Recording the route ......................... 69
Saving .............................................. 67
Selecting .......................................... 68
Settings for personal POIs ............... 67
Phone book
Adding a new contact .................... 102
Adding information to a contact .... 103
Automatically importing contacts
from the mobile phone .................. 103
Calling up ....................................... 101
Deleting a contact ......................... 104
Displaying the details of an entry ... 102
Entering characters ......................... 29
Saving a contact ............................ 104
Searching for a contact ................. 101
Symbol overview ............................ 101
Phone call
Dialing .............................................. 97
Picture viewer
Changing view ............................... 164
Displaying pictures ........................ 163
Exiting the picture viewer .............. 164
POI (navigation)
Category .......................................... 62
Defining the position for the POI
search .............................................. 61
Entering ........................................... 61
Selecting .......................................... 63
Previous destinations (navigation) .... 81
Q
Quick access for audio and tele-
phone
Changing the audio source .............. 27
Changing the station/music
track ................................................ 26
Sending DTMF tones ........................ 27
R
Radio
Activating/deactivating the sta-
tion presets display ....................... 135
Deleting a station .......................... 136
Displaying information ................... 137
Displaying station information ....... 137
Displaying the artist and track ....... 137
Overview ........................................ 134
Setting the waveband .................... 135
Sound settings (balance, bass,
treble) ............................................ 137
Storing stations ............................. 136
Switching on .................................. 134
Tagging music tracks (download-
ing/purchasing tracks from the
iTunes Store
®
) ............................... 137
Radio station
Storing ........................................... 136
Read-aloud function
Automatic ........................................ 79
Read-aloud function for e-mails ....... 116
Reading out
Traffic reports on the route .............. 79
Real-time traffic reports ..................... 76
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Active COMAND source ................. 193
Adjusting sound settings ............... 184
Adjusting the brightness ................ 184
Adjusting the color ........................ 184
Adjusting the contrast ................... 184
AUX mode ...................................... 194
CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 185
Changing the batteries .................. 182
Changing the picture format .......... 185
Control menu ................................. 189
Cordless headphones .................... 181
DVD video mode ............................ 189
Multiple users ................................ 184
Operating with the headphones ..... 183
Picture settings .............................. 184
System settings ............................. 185
Using the main loudspeaker .......... 184
Index
9
Rear view camera
Displaying the image ........................ 48
Opening the camera cover for
cleaning (COMAND) ......................... 48
Switching on/off (COMAND) ........... 48
Rear-compartment screens .............. 179
Receiving vCards ............................... 110
Redialing (telephone) .......................... 97
Remote control
Button lighting ............................... 180
Changing batteries ........................ 183
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 180
Reserve fuel level
Switching the function on/off in
COMAND ......................................... 55
Resetting (factory settings) ............... 43
Route (navigation)
Selecting an alternative route .......... 74
Setting route options (avoiding:
highways, toll roads, tunnels, fer-
ries) ................................................. 54
Setting the route type (short
route, fast route, dynamic route or
economic route) ............................... 54
Starting calculation .......................... 58
Route guidance
Continue .......................................... 74
Freeway information ........................ 72
General notes .................................. 70
Lane recommendations ................... 71
Off-road ........................................... 76
Traffic reports .................................. 76
S
Safety notes
Audio CD and MP3 mode ............... 144
Using the telephone ......................... 91
Satellite radio
Displaying information ................... 142
Overview ........................................ 139
Presets menu view ......................... 140
Registering .................................... 138
Switching to ................................... 138
SatRadio
Channel list updates ...................... 142
Memory functions .......................... 140
Music and sports alerts ................. 141
Notes ............................................. 137
Selecting a category ...................... 139
Selecting a channel ....................... 139
Tagging music tracks ..................... 141
Screen
Selecting for the remote control .... 180
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 148
Inserting/removing ........................ 148
Removing ....................................... 148
Seat cushion
Adjusting (COMAND) ....................... 46
Seats
Active multicontour seat
(COMAND) ....................................... 46
Adjusting the lumbar support
(COMAND) ....................................... 46
Balance (seat heating) ..................... 47
Massage function (COMAND) .......... 46
Massage programs (COMAND) ........ 46
Resetting settings ............................ 47
Seat functions (COMAND) ............... 46
Selecting for adjustment
(COMAND) ....................................... 46
Setting the driving dynamics
(COMAND) ....................................... 46
Selecting stations
Radio ............................................. 135
Sending DTMF tones ...........................99
Setting access data
Online and Internet ........................ 126
Setting the audio format
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 191
Setting the language
COMAND ......................................... 41
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 191
Setting the night design ..................... 34
Setting the text reader speed ............ 37
Setting the volume
Telephone calls ................................ 27
Settings
Sound settings ...............................165
Short message
see Text messages (SMS)
SIRIUS weather display
5-day forecast ..............
.................. 171
Da
ily forecast ................................. 171
Detail information .......................... 172
10
Index
Information chart ........................... 171
Selecting a location for the
weather forecast ............................ 172
Switching on/off ........................... 171
Weather map .................................174
SIRIUS weather map
Storm Guide .................................. 178
Storm Watch Box ........................... 178
Sound
Switching on/off .............................. 28
Sound settings
Balance/fader ............................... 165
Calling up the sound menu ............ 165
Equalizer ........................................ 165
Speed dial
Deleting ......................................... 113
Setting up ...................................... 112
State/province
Selecting .......................................... 57
Station presets (radio)
Deleting marked stations ...............136
Stop function
Video DVD ..................................... 163
Storing stations
Radio ............................................. 136
Switching between summer time
and standard time ............................... 35
Switching on media mode
Using the Media button ................. 143
Via the device list .......................... 144
Via the main function bar ............... 143
Via the number keypad .................. 144
System settings
Bluetooth
®
....................................... 40
Date ................................................. 35
Importing/exporting data ................ 42
Language ......................................... 41
Text reader speed ............................ 37
Time ................................................. 35
Time zone ........................................ 35
Voice Control System ...................... 37
T
Telephone
Accepting a call (COMAND) ............. 97
Adding a call .................................... 98
Adjusting the volume for calls .......... 27
Apple CarPlay™ ............................. 120
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ............................................ 94
Call lists ......................................... 111
Call waiting .................................... 100
Calls with several participants ......... 99
Conference calls .............................. 99
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) .............................. 92
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone ................................... 96
Deleting a speed dial preset .......... 113
Deleting messages ........................ 119
Dictation function for text mes-
sages and e-mails .......................... 119
Displaying Bluetooth
®
connection
details .............................................. 96
Downloading messages manually .. 115
E-mail ............................................. 113
E-mail requirements ....................... 113
E-mail settings ............................... 114
Ending an active call ...................... 100
Entering a number ........................... 97
Entering phone numbers .................. 97
Establishing the connection from
the mobile phone ............................. 95
Function restrictions ........................ 92
Functions available during a call ...... 98
General notes .................................. 91
Incoming call during an existing
call ................................................. 100
Making a call .................................... 97
Message conditions ....................... 113
Message settings ........................... 114
Operating options ............................ 91
Phone book .................................... 101
Reading messages ......................... 115
Reception and transmission vol-
ume ................................................. 96
Reconnecting a mobile phone
automatically ................................... 95
Redialing .......................................... 97
Rejecting a call (COMAND) .............. 97
Safety notes ..................................... 91
Sending DTMF tones ........................ 99
Setting up a speed dial .................. 112
Switching between calls (call wait-
ing) ..................................................
99
Index
11
Switching between mobile
phones ............................................. 95
Switching the microphone on/off .... 99
Telephone menu overview ............... 92
Text message conditions ............... 113
Text message settings ................... 114
Text messages (SMS) .................... 113
Toggling ........................................... 99
Using the telephone ......................... 97
Voice recognition ........................... 100
Writing e-mails ............................... 117
Writing text messages ................... 116
Telephone number
Entering ........................................... 97
Text messages (SMS)
Calling the sender .......................... 118
Calling up the settings menu ......... 114
Configuring the text messages
displayed ....................................... 114
Deleting ......................................... 119
Displaying details ........................... 116
Downloading manually ................... 115
Editing text templates .................... 118
Inbox .............................................. 115
Reading .......................................... 115
Reading aloud ................................ 116
Settings ......................................... 114
Storing the sender as a new
address book entry ........................ 118
Using a phone number in the text .. 118
Using text templates ...................... 118
Writing ........................................... 116
Time
Setting the format ............................ 36
Setting the time manually ................ 36
Setting the time zone ....................... 35
Setting the time/date format .......... 36
Switching automatic time on/off ..... 35
Touchpad
Calling up quick access for audio
and telephone .................................. 23
Changing the audio source .............. 27
Changing the input language for
handwriting recognition ................... 26
Changing the station/music
track ................................................ 26
Character suggestions ..................... 25
Deleting characters ......................... 25
Entering a space .............................. 25
Entering characters ......................... 25
Gesture control ................................ 22
Handwriting recognition ................... 24
Operating the touchpad ................... 22
Overview .......................................... 22
Quick access for audio and
tele-
p
hone .............................................. 26
Switching ......................................... 22
Switching input line ......................... 25
Track information .............................. 188
Traffic jam function ............................. 75
Traffic reports
Calling up a list ................................ 77
Real-time traffic report .................... 78
U
Updating the digital map .................... 87
USB audio mode
Selecting a track ............................ 149
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 148
V
Vehicle
Data acquisition ............................... 15
Vehicle settings
Calling up ......................................... 44
Video
see Video DVD
Video DVD
Changing the picture format .......... 161
Control option ................................ 160
DVD functions ............................... 162
DVD menu ..................................... 162
DVD's control menu ...................... 161
Full-screen mode ........................... 161
Function restrictions ...................... 160
Menu options ................................. 161
Notes on discs ............................... 159
Operation ....................................... 159
Overview ........................................ 160
Pause function ............................... 163
Picture settings .............................. 161
Playing conditions .......................... 159
12
Index
Safety notes .................................. 159
Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 163
Stop function ................................. 163
Switching to ................................... 160
Video menu ................................... 162
Voice Control System
Settings ........................................... 37
Volume, adjusting
Navigation messages ....................... 27
W
Weather map (SIRIUS)
Activating/deactivating display
levels ............................................. 175
Calling up ....................................... 174
Legend ........................................... 177
Moving ........................................... 174
Showing/hiding the menu ............. 174
Time stamp .................................... 177
Weather memory (SIRIUS)
Selecting an area ........................... 174
Storing an area .............................. 174
Web browser
Entering a web address ................. 129
Wi-Fi
Changing the SSID name (USA) ....... 39
Connecting the device (Canada) ...... 40
Connecting the device (USA) ........... 38
General notes (Canada) ................... 40
General notes (USA) ........................ 38
Generating a new security key
(USA) ............................................... 39
Overview (Canada) ........................... 38
Overview (USA) ................................ 37
WiFi
Activating (Canada) .......................... 38
Activating (USA) ............................... 38
Connecting a device via WPS PBC
(CANADA) ........................................ 40
Connecting a device via WPS PBC
(USA) ............................................... 39
Connecting a device via WPS PIN
(CANADA) ........................................ 40
Connecting a device via WPS PIN
(USA) ............................................... 38
Selecting a hotspot .......................... 40
Index
13
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system can give incorrect navi-
gation commands if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. Digital maps do not cover all areas
nor all routes in an area. For example, a route
may have been diverted or the direction of a one-
way street may have changed.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every
second.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meet
s the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is recommended to install it at a distance
of at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between the
radiation source and a person's body (not
including limbs such as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA only: The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
14
Introduction
Canada only: The wireless devices of this vehi-
cle comply with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1) These devices may not cause interference,
and
2) These devices must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Correct use
You need to observe the following information
when using the multimedia system:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Using roof carriers may impair the correct func-
tioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite radio,
GPS).
Attaching metalized retrofit film to the wind-
shield may affect radio reception. This can have
a negative impact on all other antennas (e.g.
emergency call antenna) in the vehicle interior.
Protection against theft: this device is equip-
ped with technical provisions to protect it
against theft. Further information on protection
against theft can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Qualified specialist workshop
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recording
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
events
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in detecting and rectifying faults and
defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle function
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and fault data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranty events
R
quality assurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more
information there, if required.
Introduction
15
Z
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, after
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as dur-
ing air bag deployment or when hitting a road
obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
how various systems in your vehicle are oper-
ating
R
whether or not the driver and passenger seat
belts are fastened
R
how far (if at all) the driver is depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
how fast the vehicle is traveling
This data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by
your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, can combine the EDR data wi
th
the ty
pe of personal identification data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties that have the spe-
cial equipment, such as law enforcement, can
read the information by accessing the vehicle or
the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component
of the Su
p-
plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.
Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing
the EDR component may result in a malfunction
of the SRS Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
16
Introduction
Information on copyright
Information on licenses for free and Open
Source software used in your vehicle and in the
electronic components can be found on this
website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
opensource.
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Introduction
17
Z
Overview
Components
:
Display (Y page 19)
;
Control panel (Y page 20)
=
Controller and buttons (Y page 21)
The multimedia system consists of:
R
the display
R
the control panel with a single drive or DVD changer
R
the controller and buttons
R
the touchpad
R
two connection options for USB devices or via Media Interface in the center console
An iPod
®
is connected via a USB cable.
Functions
R
HD FM radio and HD AM radio/satellite
radio
R
Media
-
Media support: audio CD, MP3 CD, DVD
video, two connection options for USB or
via Media Interface, SD card, Bluetooth
®
audio
An iPod
®
, for example, can be connected
directly to the USB via the integrated Media
Interface.
-
Media search
R
Sound system
You can select from two sound systems:
-
harman/kardon
®
Logic7
®
surround sound
system
-
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound sys-
tem
R
Navigation system
-
Navigation via the hard drive
-
Destination entry, for example using key-
word search
-
Realistic 3D map with textured city models
-
Personal POIs and routes using SD memory
card
-
Navigation functions, e.g. compass display
-
Dynamic route guidance with traffic reports
via SIRIUS satellite radio
18
Overview
Overview and operation
R
Communication
-
Messaging functions (text messages, e-
mail)
-
Address book
-
Internet browser
-
Mercedes-Benz Apps with Google™ Local
Search, destination and route download,
Facebook, Google Street View™, stock pri-
ces, news and much more
-
Mercedes-Benz Mobile Website
-
Wi-Fi interface for the connection of a
smartphone to the multimedia system
-
Wi-Fi hotspot functionality to connect a
tablet PC or laptop in order to enable
access to the Internet using the customer's
mobile phone
R
SIRIUS Weather
-
Weather data as an information chart (cur-
rent forecast, 5-day preview, detailed infor-
mation)
-
Weather data on the weather map, e.g. rain
radar data, storm characteristics and the
track of tropical cyclones (hurricanes, tor-
nadoes)
R
Vehicle functions
-
Vehicle settings, e.g. fuel consumption
-
Ionization
-
360° camera
-
Rear view camera
-
Seat functions
-
DYNAMIC SELECT (individual drive pro-
gram)
-
Driving dynamics display in the multimedia
system for vehicles with the Off-Road Engi-
neering package (see the vehicle Opera-
tor's Manual)
R
Favorites button
-
Fast access to favorites functions using the
favorites button on the controller
Display
General notes
!
Do not use the space in front of the display
for storage. Objects placed here could dam-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may then temporarily switch
off completely.
Overview
In the status bar at the top you will see the time
and other displays, depending on the settings.
Below it you will see the main display field.
The climate control status display is briefly dis-
played when you operate the climate control
system.
The example shows media playback in SD mem-
ory card mode.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Clean
the display screen, when necessary, with a com-
mercially available microfiber cloth and cleaning
agent for TFT and LCD displays. Do not apply
pressure to the display surface when cleaning it,
as this could cause irreversible damage to the
display. Then, dry the surface with a dry micro-
fiber cloth.
Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or abra-
sive cleaning agents. These could damage the
display surface.
Overview
19
Overview and operation
Control panel
Function Page
:
Switches to radio mode 134
Calls up the Radio menu 135
;
Switches to the last selected
media mode
143
Calls up the Media menu 143
=
Inserts/removes a CD/DVD
into/from the single drive
146
Inserts a CD/DVD into the
DVD changer
147
Removes a CD/DVD from
the DVD changer
147
?
Selects the previous station
from the station list
135
Skips backwards to a track 149
Rewinds 149
A
Inserts/removes a CD/DVD
8 Single drive
146
V DVD changer
147
B
Clear button 21
Deletes characters
Deletes an entry
C
Selects the next station from
the station list
135
Skips forwards to a track 149
Fast forward 149
Function Page
D
Number pad
Saves a station 136
Authorizes (connects) a
mobile phone
94
Telephone number entry 97
Searches for a contact 101
Character entry 30
z Displays the current
track being played (if the data
medium supports track infor-
mation)
144
g Selects stations by
entering the frequency man-
ually
135
g Selects a track
149
E
Switches the multimedia sys-
tem on/off
27
Adjusts the volume 27
F
Inserts/removes the SD card 148
G
Accepts a call 97
Makes a call 97
Redial 97
Accepts a new call when a
call is being made (call wait-
ing)
100
H
Rejects a call 97
Ends an active call 100
20
Overview
Overview and operation
Function Page
I
Switches the mute function
on/off
28
Switches off navigation
announcements
28
J
Switches to navigation mode 53
Calls up the navigation sys-
tem menu
88
Function Page
K
Calls up the telephone menu 92
L
Calls up vehicle settings 44
Buttons and controller
Overview
:
Clear button
;
Switches off the display
=
Favorites button
?
Back button
A
Controller
The controller may be equipped as a 4-button
controller as follows:
R
with the T button instead of button ; for
the seat settings
R
with a further favorites button instead of but-
ton ;
The controller may be equipped as a 2-button
controller as follows:
R
with buttons : and ?
R
with the favorites button, button ? plus a
touchpad instead of button :
(
Y page 22)
R
with the favorites button and button ?
instead of button :
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the controller is
equipped with buttons : and ?.
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the basic display of the current operating
mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic
display of the current operating mode.
Clear button
The delete button is on the control panel and on
the controller.
X
To delete individual characters: briefly
press the $ button on the control panel.
or
X
Briefly press the j clear button on the
controller.
Overview
21
Overview and operation
X
To delete an entire entry: press and hold the
$ button on the control panel.
or
X
Press and hold the j clear button on the
controller.
Favorites button
You can assign predefined functions using the
g favorites button and call them up by press-
ing the button (
Y page 41).
Display off button
You can switch off the display using the
button.
Seat button
If the controller is equipped with the T but-
ton, you can call up the menu for the seat set-
tings (
Y page 46).
Touchpad
Touchpad overview
!
Do not use any sharp objects on the touch-
pad. This could damage the touchpad.
:
Touch-sensitive surface
;
Favorites button
=
Calls up quick access for audio and tele-
phone
?
Back button
Using the touchpad, you can:
R
select menu items in the display
(
Y page 22).
R
enter characters (handwriting recognition)
(
Y page 24).
R
control the active audio source (Y page 26).
R
create, manage and call up favorites
(
Y page 31).
R
enter destinations in navigation
R
save entries
Further information on operating the touchpad
(
Y page 22).
Do not press your fingers too hard on the touch-
pad. This could cause malfunctions.
Switching the touchpad on/off
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Touchpad if the touchpad is equipped
with handwriting recognition.
X
Select Activate Touchpad.
The touchpad is switched on O or off ª.
Operating the touchpad
Selecting a menu item
X
Use one finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your finger up, down, to the left or right.
The selection in the display moves in accord-
ance with the direction of movement.
You can navigate in lists or menus in this way.
22
Touchpad
Overview and operation
Confirming a selection
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
A menu, an option or an application is started.
Calling up quick access for audio and
telephone
X
Use two fingers to touch the lower part of the
touch-sensitive surface.
X
Swipe your fingers up.
Quick access is displayed.
Further information on quick access for audio
and telephone (
Y page 26).
Hiding the quick access for audio and
telephone
X
Use two fingers to touch the touch-sensitive
surface.
X
Swipe your fingers down.
Quick access is hidden.
Operating the control for vehicle and
sound settings
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Turn both fingers clockwise.
The control setting is increased.
or
X
Turn both fingers counter-clockwise.
The control setting is decreased.
Moving the map
X
Use one finger to press the touch-sensitive
surface until you reach the pressure point.
The crosshair is shown.
Touchpad
23
Overview and operation
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface again with
one finger.
X
Swipe your finger in any direction.
The map is moved is the direction of move-
ment.
Zooming in on the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced slightly apart.
X
Glide your fingers away from each other.
The map scale is magnified.
Zooming out of the map
X
Touch the touch-sensitive surface with two
fingers, spaced far apart.
X
Glide your fingers towards each other.
The map scale is reduced.
Handwriting recognition
Handwriting recognition overview
This function is only available if the touchpad is
equipped with handwriting recognition.
You can use handwriting recognition for text,
numbers or characters in any input line.
:
Active input line
;
Inserts a space (Y page 25)
=
Illustration of the touch-sensitive surface
?
Deletes characters (Y page 25)
If the character that you have entered can be
interpreted in different ways, these options are
displayed. More information on the character
suggestions (
Y page 25).
You can also switch the text reader function of
the handwriting recognition on and off
(
Y page 25).
:
To exit the menu
;
To return to handwriting recognition
=
To use the phone book or text templates
24
Touchpad
Overview and operation
?
To change the input line or the position of
the cursor
A
To change the input language
B
To finish character entry
X
To display the menu: press the touchpad.
Switching the text reader function of
the handwriting recognition on/off
You can switch the text reader function of the
handwriting recognition on or off.
X
Press the Ø button.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select System Settings: slide 6, turn
and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Touchpad: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Out Handwriting Recogni‐
tion.
The text reader function is switched on O or
off ª.
Entering characters
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use one finger to draw the desired character
on the touch-sensitive surface.
The character recognized is entered in the
input line. You can draw the next character on
the touch-sensitive surface.
If the character can be interpreted in different
ways, these options are displayed.
More information on the character suggestions
(
Y page 25).
Character suggestions
:
Character recognized
;
Character suggestions
X
To select a character suggestion: turn the
controller.
The selected character is entered instead of
the automatically recognized character. Char-
acter entry can be continued.
Inserting a space
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the right.
A space is entered into the input line.
Deleting characters
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Use your finger to touch the touch-sensitive
surface and swipe to the left.
The character last entered is deleted.
Switching input lines
Touchpad
25
Overview and operation
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: glide your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To select the input line: swipe up or down and
press.
The selected input line is active and character
entry can be continued.
Moving the cursor within the input line
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select p: glide your finger to the left or
right and press.
X
To move the cursor: glide to the left or right.
Changing the input language for hand-
writing recognition
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
Press the touchpad.
A symbol is shown.
X
To select B: swipe your finger to the left or
right and press.
The list of available input languages appears.
X
To select a language: swipe up or down and
press.
The input language for handwriting recogni-
tion has been changed.
Searching in lists
The phone book search is used as an example.
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
Selecting the touchpad or controller for
character entry
Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or
characters has been selected.
X
To switch to character entry on the touch-
pad: press the touchpad with your finger.
Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is
active.
X
To switch to character entry with the con-
troller: press the controller.
Character entry with the controller is active.
Quick access for audio and telephone
Changing the station/music track
Depending on the audio source that is currently
activated, you can use this function to select the
next station or music track.
X
Call up quick access (Y page 23).
The current audio source is displayed.
X
To select the previous or next station or music
track: swipe to the left or right.
The selected station or music track is played.
26
Touchpad
Overview and operation
Changing the audio source
X
Call up quick access (Y page 23).
The current audio source is displayed.
X
To display the available audio sources:
swipe upwards with one finger.
X
To select an audio source: glide your finger
to the left or right and press.
The selected audio source is played.
Sending DTMF tones
The function is not supported by all mobile
phones (see the manufacturer's operating
instructions).
X
Call up quick access during a call (Y page 23).
X
To select characters: glide your finger to the
left or right and press.
Every character selected will be transmitted
immediately.
Basic functions
Switching the multimedia system on/
off
X
Press the q control knob.
When you switch the multimedia system on, a
warning message will appear. The multimedia
system calls up the previously selected menu.
If you switch the multimedia system off, play-
back of the current media source will also be
switched off.
Adjusting the volume
Adjusting the volume for media sources
X
Turn the q control knob.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
The volume of the media source currently
selected changes.
Adjusting the volume for traffic
announcements and navigation
announcements
During traffic or navigation announcements:
X
Turn the q control knob.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
You can set the volume for navigation
announcements to be different from the vol-
ume of the respective media source.
Adjusting the volume for phone calls
You can adjust the volume for hands-free mode
during a telephone call.
X
Turn the q control knob.
or
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
i
Setting the volume for the Voice Control
System voice output; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Basic functions
27
Overview and operation
Switching the sound on or off
Media source sound
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel or
on the multifunction steering wheel.
The sound is switched off. If the audio output
is switched off, the status line will show the
8 symbol. If you switch the media source
or change the volume, the sound is automat-
ically switched on.
i
Even if the sound is switched off, you will still
hear navigation system announcements.
Switching navigation announcements
off and on again
X
To switch navigation announcements off:
press the 8 button during an announce-
ment.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements on
again: switch the multimedia system off and
then on again (
Y page 27).
or
X
Start a new route calculation (Y page 58).
or
X
Select +: while route guidance is active,
show the menu and press the controller
(
Y page 73).
Function menu
X
Press the Õ button or the ß, $,
%, or Ø button.
Navigation: the map displays the current
vehicle position.
Radio: the basic menu of the last radio mode
set appears.
Media: the basic display for the last media
source set appears. In the example, Media
Interface mode is set.
Telephone/Internet: the basic menu of the
last communication function set appears
(telephone, address book, Internet).
Vehicle: the basic display appears.
X
To show the menu: slide 4 the controller.
The menu for the selected functions appears.
Depending on the operation, the marking is
shown:
R
in the main function bar at the top or
R
below in the menu bar
X
To select a menu item: turn and press the
controller.
If you have selected a menu item from the
main function bar, switch to the last menu set
for the selected function.
The menu bar features options within the cur-
rently set function.
Selecting the operating mode for a
main function
For the main functions, e.g. communication or
media, you can choose from the available oper-
ating modes.
In the communication menu, you can:
R
switch to telephone mode
R
call up the address book
R
call up the Internet
R
call up the Digital Operator's Manual for
Tel/
®.
X
Press the % button.
The phone menu appears.
X
To call up the menu: press the % button
again.
or
X
To select Tel/®: slide 5 and press the
controller.
The communication menu appears. Phone
is
at the front.
X
To select a menu option: turn and press the
controller.
28
Basic functions
Overview and operation
Character entry (telephony)
Entering characters using the charac-
ter bar
In the example, a new entry is added to the
phone book (
Y page 102). The new entry has
three input lines for entering the last name, first
name and phone number. The input line for the
surname is selected automatically.
Entering characters
X
Turn and press the controller.
The character selected in character bar ; is
entered into surname input line :.
X
Enter the complete last name.
Deleting individual characters
X
To switch to the bottom line of the character
bar: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select F: turn and press the controller.
The character last entered is deleted.
Deleting an entire entry
X
To switch to the bottom line of the character
bar: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select F: turn and hold the controller until
the entire entry has been deleted.
Switching input lines
X
To switch to the bottom line of the character
bar: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select 5: turn and press the controller.
The input line for the first name is selected.
You can enter the characters for the first
name.
When the telephone number input line is selec-
ted, the character bar is adapted for entering
digits.
Entering characters
X
Turn and press the controller.
The character selected in character bar ? is
entered into telephone number input line =.
Finishing an entry and saving a contact
X
To switch to the bottom line of the character
bar: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
Further functions available in the character
bar
Symbol Function
Ä
Switches the character bar for
entering characters, digits and
symbols
*
Switches the character bar to
upper-case or lower-case letters
B
Changes the country setting for
the character bar
F
Deletes a character or an entry
4, 5 Selects the input line
2, 3 Moves the cursor within the input
line
b
Confirms an entry
%
Cancels input
S
Inserts a line break (when writing
text messages)
Character entry (telephony)
29
Overview and operation
Entering characters using the number
keypad
If an input line for text or numbers is selected,
the number keypad is used for the character
entry.
X
For example, to enter the letter c: press the
l number key briefly three times in suc-
cession.
An additional display area is shown with all
the available characters. Press the key
repeatedly to go through the characters until
c
is highlighted.
X
Wait until the character display goes out.
The letter c
is entered in the input line.
Character entry (navigation)
Entering characters using the charac-
ter bar
:
Characters NEW (orange color) entered by
the user
;
Characters automatically added by the mul-
timedia system YORK
=
Characters not currently available
?
Currently selected character
A
Characters currently available
B
Character bar
The example shows the address entry
(
Y page 57).
X
To enter a character: turn, slide 6 or 5
and press the controller.
Selected character : is entered in the upper
line. The multimedia system adds the missing
characters and shows the entry that best
matches the current input.
The characters are available A or not =,
depending on the characters already entered
and the data stored in the digital map.
The G symbol indicates that an entry exists
more than once.
X
To delete a character: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting F.
X
To delete an entire entry: slide 6 and turn
the controller; then after selecting F press
and hold down the controller until the entire
entry is deleted.
X
To confirm an entry: slide 6 and turn the
controller, then press it after selecting¬.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
The location selection list appears. The selec-
ted entry is highlighted.
The example shows the character entry when
you save a destination as a navigable contact in
the address book (
Y page 58). The cursor is
located in the input line.
X
To select an input line: slide 6 and turn
the controller, then press it after selecting 4
or 5.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller repeatedly until the
character bar disappears.
X
To move the cursor: select the input line.
X
Turn and press the controller.
or
X
Slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting 2 or 3.
30
Character entry (navigation)
Overview and operation
X
To change the character bar language:
slide 6 and turn the controller, then press it
after selecting B.
A menu appears.
X
Turn and press the controller.
The character set for the selected language is
set.
The character bar entry functions are listed in
the table.
Symbol Function
Ä
Switches between digits and sym-
bols
*
Switches the character bar from
uppercase to lowercase letters
B
Changes the character bar lan-
guage
F
Deletes a character or an entry
è
Switches to keyword search
(
Y page 59)
4, 5 Selects the input line
2, 3 Moves the cursor within the input
line
¬
Confirms an entry
&
Cancels input
Entering characters using the number
keypad
X
Press one of the number keypad buttons, e.g.
l, once or repeatedly in quick succession.
The character appears at the bottom of the
display when the key is pressed. The first
available letter is highlighted.
You see which characters you can enter with
that key. Each time the key is pressed, the
next character is selected.
X
Wait until the character display goes out.
The entries matching your input are shown in
the list.
Favorites
Overview of favorites
:
Assigns new favorites (Y page 32)
;
Renames a selected favorite (Y page 32)
=
Moves a selected favorite (Y page 32)
?
Deletes a selected favorite (Y page 32)
X
To display the favorites overview: press
the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
You can manage a total of 20 favorites.
Further information on how to select and display
a favorite (
Y page 31).
Displaying and selecting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To call up a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
Favorites
31
Overview and operation
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Reassign: turn and press the con-
troller.
The categories for the available favorites are
displayed.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The corresponding favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To add a favorite at the desired position:
turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position,
then this will be deleted.
Adding your own favorites
You can create your own favorites to help you to
use these functions, for example:
R
Calling up telephone numbers from the tele-
phone book
R
Selecting a radio station
R
Skipping to a specific place in a track or an
audio book
R
Calling up favored media
R
Selecting navigation destinations for route
calculation
The example describes how to add a contact's
telephone number as a favorite.
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Select the contact.
X
To add a telephone number as a favorite
at the desired position: press and hold the
favorites button on the controller until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Turn and press the controller.
If there is already a favorite at this position, it
will be deleted and replaced by a new one.
Renaming favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be renamed: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Rename: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Enter characters using the controller.
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The favorite is renamed.
Moving favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be moved: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Move: turn and press the controller.
X
To store a favorite in the desired order:
turn and press the controller.
The favorite is moved.
If one favorite is stored over another one, this
is then is deleted.
Deleting favorites
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select a favorite to be deleted: turn the
controller.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
32
Favorites
Overview and operation
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select Yes
the favorite is deleted. No
cancels the procedure.
Favorites
33
Overview and operation
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Display settings
Setting the brightness
The brightness detected by the display light sen-
sor affects the setting options for this function.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Brightness.
A control appears.
X
To select the desired brightness: turn and
press the controller.
Display design
The display features optimized designs for day-
time and night-time operation. You can set the
design by manually selecting day or night design
or opt for an automatic setting.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Display: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Day Mode, Night Mode or Auto:
turn and press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
34
Display settings
System settings
Design Explanation
Day Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to day design.
Night Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Auto
The multimedia system
evaluates the data of the
light sensor and automat-
ically switches over the
display design.
Switching the display on/off
Switching off the display
X
Press the Ø button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Display Off: turn and press the
controller.
The display goes out.
X
To switch the display on again: press the
controller.
Time settings
General information
The multimedia system can automatically set
the time and date.
The following navigation system functions
require the time, time zone and summer/stand-
ard time to be set correctly in order to work
properly:
R
route guidance on routes with time-depend-
ent traffic guidance
R
calculation of expected time of arrival
Switching automatic time on and off
The Automatic Time Settings function is
used to activate or deactivate the automatic
setting of the time and date. This function is
activated when the vehicle leaves the factory.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To activate Oor deactivate ª Automatic
Time Settings: turn and press the control-
ler.
Setting the time zone
To set the time zone, the Automatic Time
Settings function must be activated.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Time Zone:: turn and press the
controller.
A list of countries appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
To select the country in which you are
currently driving: turn and press the con-
troller.
The country is accepted. A time zone list may
also be displayed, depending on the country
selected.
X
To select the desired time zone: turn and
press the controller.
The time zone is accepted.
A list of available options for setting summer
time appears (
Y page 35).
Setting summer and standard time
The Daylight Saving Time function is not
available in all countries.
Using the Daylight Saving Time
function,
you can set the automatic changeover to sum-
mer time or switch the summer time settings on
and off. The changeover to summer time advan-
ces the time by one hour.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
Time settings
35
System settings
Z
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Daylight Saving Time: turn and
press the controller.
A list with options appears.
X
To select Automatic, On or Off: turn and
press the controller.
Setting Function
Automatic
The summer and
standard time are
automatically
changed over.
On
The clock is advanced
one hour ahead of
standard time.
Off
The standard time for
the chosen time zone
is selected.
Setting the time manually
i
Using the manual time settings, you can set
the time forward or back by up to several
hours.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Set Time Manually: turn and
press the controller.
An analog clock appears.
X
To set the hour: turn the controller.
X
To highlight the minutes: slide 9 the
controller.
X
To set the minutes: turn and press the con-
troller.
The time is accepted.
The Automatic Time Settings
function is
deactivated ª.
If Automatic
is set for the summer time
changeover, you will see a prompt asking
whether the automatic changeover should be
maintained between summer and winter
time.
i
If Automatic Time Settings is reactiva-
ted, the previous settings for time zone and
summer time changeover are restored.
Setting the time and date format
Use this function to set the time and date format
for all displays in the vehicle.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Time: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Format: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select the desired date format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
To select the desired time format: turn and
press the controller.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Abbreviation Meaning
DD.MM.YYYY
Day.Month.Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
DD/MM/YYYY
Day/Month/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
YYYY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year (all
four digits)
36
Time settings
System settings
Abbreviation Meaning
YYYY-MM-DD
Year - Month - Day
date format, year (all
four digits)
YY/MM/DD
Year/Month/Day
date format, year (two
digits)
MM/DD/YYYY
Month/Day/Year
date format, year (all
four digits)
HH:MM (24 hrs)
Hours : Minutes
(24 hour time format)
HH:MM (AM/PM)
Hours : Minutes
(AM/PM time format)
Text reader settings
X
Press the Ø button on the control panel.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Text Reader Speed: turn and
press the controller.
A list appears.
X
Select Fast, Medium or Slow.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
Voice Control System settings
Opening/closing the help window
i
If the set system language is not supported
by the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
The help window also shows you information on
audible instructions:
R
during individualization
R
during subsequent operation of the Voice
Control System
X
Press the Ø button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Voice Control: turn and press the
controller.
X
To activate O or deactivate ª Help Win‐
dow: press the controller.
Further information on the Voice Control Sys-
tem; see the separate operating instructions.
Individualization
Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
Voice Control System to your own voice. This
will help improve voice recognition; see the sep-
arate operating instructions.
Wi-Fi
Overview (USA)
Establishing a Wi-Fi connection between the
multimedia system and a Wi-Fi-enabled device,
such as a tablet computer or smartphone,
requires the following:
R
Wi-Fi must be activated on the multimedia
system and on the device to be connected.
If the multimedia system is to be used as a Wi-Fi
hotspot:
R
The multimedia system must be connected to
an Internet-enabled mobile phone via Blue-
tooth
®
or USB.
R
The Internet access data for the mobile phone
network provider is selected or set in the mul-
timedia system.
R
An Internet connection must be established
on the multimedia system.
Wi-Fi
37
System settings
Z
Overview (Canada)
The following requirements for establishing a
Wi-Fi connection between the multimedia sys-
tem and a Wi-Fi hotspot of a Wi-Fi-enabled
device, such as a smartphone, or another hot-
spot must be met:
R
Wi-Fi must be enabled on the multimedia sys-
tem.
R
Switch on Wi-Fi hotspot on the external
device; see the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Activating Wi-Fi (USA)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: press the con-
troller.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To select OActivate: press the controller.
Activating Wi-Fi (Canada)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: press the con-
troller.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To switch on OActivate: turn and press the
controller.
Available Wi-Fi hotspots are searched for and
displayed.
Connecting the device (USA)
General notes
The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may vary
depending on the device to be connected. Fol-
low the instructions that are shown in the dis-
play. Further information; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
Connecting a device via WPS PIN (USA)
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
using WPS PIN".
X
Select Connect via WPS PIN.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and "Connect using WPS PIN". The
vehicle is displayed with the SSID MB Hot‐
spot XXXXX.
The device to be connected generates a PIN.
38
Wi-Fi
System settings
X
Also enter this PIN into the multimedia sys-
tem.
X
To confirm the entry: press the controller.
Connecting a device via WPS PBC (USA)
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
via push button".
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
X
Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected and Connect
via WPS PBC. The vehi-
cle is displayed with the SSID MB Hotspot
XXXXX.
X
To confirm the entry: press the controller.
Generating a new security key (USA)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To select Generate Security Key: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Regenerate: press the controller.
A new security key is generated.
X
To save the security key: turn the controller
and select Save
.
The Wi-Fi menu appears. The new security key
will now be displayed and verified when a
connection is established via the security key.
The connection must be re-established with
the newly created security key.
i
Device connections established using the
previous security key will no longer work after
the security key is changed. You have to
reconnect these devices (
Y page 38).
Changing the name of the SSID (USA)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To select Change SSID: turn and press the
controller.
A dialog for entering the SSID appears.
X
Enter the new SSID.
X
To select ¬: turn and press the controller.
The new SSID is shown on the device to be
connected and in the Connect Using
Security Key menu.
i
Device connections established using the
previous SSID will no longer work after the
SSID is changed. You have to reconnect these
devices (
Y page 40).
Wi-Fi
39
System settings
Z
Connecting the device (Canada)
General notes
The exact Wi-Fi connection procedure may vary
depending on the device to be connected. Fol-
low the instructions that are shown in the dis-
play. Further information; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
Selecting a hotspot (Canada)
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears. A search for hot-
spots is carried out.
X
To select a hotspot: turn and press the con-
troller.
Connecting a device via WPS PBC (Can-
ada)
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
via push button".
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
Select WiFi.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To select one of the hotspots that has been
found: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Connect via WPS PBC.
X
Press the push button on the device to be
connected.
X
To confirm the entry: press the controller.
Connecting a device via WPS PIN (Can-
ada)
Requirement: for this type of connection, the
device to be connected must support "Connect
using WPS PIN".
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
Select System Settings.
X
To select WiFi: turn and press the controller.
The Wi-Fi menu appears.
X
To select one of the hotspots that has been
found: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Connect via WPS PIN.
X
Enter the WPS PIN generated by the multime-
dia system into the device.
X
To confirm the entry: press the controller.
Bluetooth
®
settings
General information about Blue-
tooth
®
Bluetooth
®
-capable devices, e.g. mobile
phones, need to comply with a certain profile in
order to be connected to the multimedia sys-
tem. Every Bluetooth
®
device has its own spe-
cific Bluetooth
®
name.
Bluetooth
®
technology is a standard for short-
range wireless data transmissions up to approx-
imately 10 m.
You can use Bluetooth
®
to connect your mobile
phone to the multimedia system, for example:
R
use the hands-free system
R
establish an Internet connection
R
listen to music using Bluetooth
®
Audio
R
exchange vCards
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.
40
Bluetooth
®
settings
System settings
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth
®
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To activate O or deactivate ª Activate
Bluetooth: turn and press the controller.
Setting the system language
General information
This function allows you to determine the lan-
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
messages. The selected language affects the
characters available for entry.
i
The navigation announcements are not
available in all languages. If a language is not
available, the navigation announcements will
be in English.
i
When you set the system language, the lan-
guage of the Voice Control System will
change accordingly. If it is not supported by
the Voice Control System, English will be
selected.
Setting the system language
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Language: turn and press the con-
troller.
The list of languages appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select the desired language.
The multimedia system loads the selected
language and sets it.
Calling up the favorite functions
The favorites function can be called up as fol-
lows:
R
via the System Settings menu
R
via the Favorites button on the controller
(
Y page 21)
R
via the Favorites button on the touchpad
(
Y page 22)
Calling up the Favorites function via the sys-
tem menu
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Favorite Functions: press the
controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
Calling up the Favorites function using the
controller
X
Press the favorites button on the controller.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
Calling up the Favorites function via the
touchpad
X
Press the favorites button on the touchpad.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To select the desired function, e.g. Phone‐
book: turn and press the controller.
Calling up the favorite functions
41
System settings
Z
Exiting the Favorites function
X
Press the Favorites button again.
or
X
Press the % button.
Further information on the Favorites function
(
Y page 31).
Importing/exporting data
General notes
!
Never remove the stick or card when writing
data to the USB stick or the memory card. You
may otherwise lose data.
Using this function you can do the following with
your personal data:
R
transfer your data from one multimedia sys-
tem to another multimedia system
The transfer may be limited or not possible,
depending on the vehicle's equipment.
R
make a backup copy of your personal data
(export data) and load it again (import data)
R
protect your data from unwanted export by
activating a pin prompt (presetting: deactiva-
ted ª)
You can either use an SD card or a USB storage
device (e.g. a USB stick) as temporary storage.
Please remember that the NFTS file system is
not supported. The FAT32 file system is recom-
mended.
You can obtain further information on data
import and export from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Activating/deactivating PIN protec-
tion
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
X
To activate O or deactivate ª Activate
PIN Protection: turn and press the control-
ler.
When activating PIN protection, you will be
prompted to enter a PIN.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
You will be prompted to enter the PIN again.
X
Enter the PIN again and select ¬.
The PIN prompt now protects your personal
data from unwanted export.
i
If you deactivate your PIN protection, you
will first be prompted to enter your PIN. If you
have forgotten your PIN, an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your
PIN protection for you. Alternatively, you can
deactivate PIN protection by resetting your
personal data (
Y page 43).
Importing/exporting data
Connecting a USB storage device
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
or
X
Connect a USB device (e.g. a USB memory
stick) (
Y page 148).
Importing/exporting data
i
If you import data such as address data, the
existing data on the multimedia system is
overwritten. You will see a message to this
effect. The multimedia system is restarted
after the data import.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
42
Importing/exporting data
System settings
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Data Import/Export: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Import Data or Export Data.
If PIN protection is activated, a PIN prompt
appears when you select Export Data
.
X
To enter the 4-digit PIN and select ¬: turn
and press the controller.
PIN protection is deactivated.
X
To select Memory Card, USB 1 or USB 2: turn
and press the controller.
This function exports all the data to the selec-
ted disc.
i
You can export address data, bookmarks,
system settings that you have made and radio
station lists, for example.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of
data.
Reset function
General information
You can reset the multimedia system to the fac-
tory settings. This includes the deletion of all of
your personal data on the multimedia system.
These include:
R
Station presets
R
Entries in the destination memory
R
Entries in the list of previous destinations in
the navigation system
R
Entries in the address book
R
Authorized telephone
In addition, an activated PIN protection, which
you have used to protect your data against
unwanted export, will be deactivated. Resetting
is recommended before selling or transferring
ownership of your vehicle, for example.
Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
Resetting the multimedia system
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select Reset: turn and press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
reset.
X
Select Yes.
A prompt appears again asking whether you
really wish to reset.
X
Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings and restarted.
Reset function
43
System settings
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating mobile communications equipment in
the vehicle.
Vehicle settings
Calling up vehicle settings
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Vehicle Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select the desired vehicle setting: turn and
press the controller.
The main area with the setting element is
active.
Selecting a different vehicle setting:
X
To activate the menu for selecting the vehicle
setting: slide 5 the controller.
Exiting the vehicle settings:
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Ambient lighting
General notes
You can set the following for the ambient light-
ing:
R
Brightness
This setting makes an additional change to
the brightness of the ambient lighting.
R
Color
This setting changes the color of the ambient
lighting.
R
Interior welcome light
Ambient lighting is activated for a short time
when the driver's door is opened.
Setting the brightness
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ambient Light Brightness: turn
and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the brightness value: turn and
press the controller.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the color
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ambient Light Color: turn and
press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To select a color: turn and press the control-
ler.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Setting the interior welcome light
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Interior Welcome Light: turn
and press the controller.
X
Press the controller.
The function is switched on or off, depending
on the previous status.
44
Vehicle settings
Vehicle functions
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching locator lighting on/off
If you switch on the Locator Lighting func-
tion, the exterior lighting is switched on for a
short time when it is dark. The light switch must
be set to Ã.
The exterior lighting remains on for 40 seconds
after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the
engine, the locator lighting is switched off and
the automatic driving lights are activated.
You can find further information on the auto-
matic headlamp mode in the vehicle Operator's
Manual.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Locator Lighting: turn and press
the controller.
X
Press the controller.
The function is switched on or off, depending
on the previous status.
You can find further information on the locking
feature in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
i
There may be fewer settings or none
depending on your vehicle's equipment.
Setting the switch-off delay time
Interior lighting switch-off delay time
The interior lighting is activated for the duration
of the switch-off delay time when the SmartKey
is removed from the ignition lock.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Interior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
and press the controller.
You can find further information on the interior
lighting in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Exterior lighting switch-off delay time
If you switch on the Exterior Lighting
Delayed Switch-off function, the exterior
lighting is switched on for a short time after the
engine is switched off. The light switch must be
set to Ã.
The exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close all
the doors and the tailgate, the exterior lighting
switches off after the set time.
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Exterior Lighting Delayed
Switch-off: turn and press the controller.
The setting element is active.
X
To change the delayed switch-off time: turn
and press the controller.
Displaying energy consumption and
generated electrical energy
A bar graph displays the energy consumption
and the generated electrical energy.
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Consumption: turn and press the
controller.
The energy consumption and the generated
electrical energy for the last 15 minutes of the
journey is shown.
For further information on energy consumption,
see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the fuel consumption
A bar graph displays the fuel consumption.
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Consumption: turn and press the
controller.
The fuel consumption for the last 15 minutes
of the journey is shown.
Switching the ionization on/off
The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in
the vehicle interior. Further information (see the
vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up Vehicle Settings (Y page 44).
X
To select Ionization: turn and press the
controller.
The ionization is switched on or off, depend-
ing on the previous status: press and turn the
controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Vehicle settings
45
Vehicle functions
Z
Seats
Overview
You can configure the following seat functions in
the menu:
R
Backrest side bolsters
R
Lumbar
R
Seat cushion
R
Massage
R
Dynamics
R
Seat heating balance
i
There may be fewer settings or none
depending on your vehicle's equipment.
Selecting the adjustment function
and seat
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
To select Vehicle from the main function bar:
turn and press the controller.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Seat Settings: turn and press the
controller.
The seat settings menu is shown.
or
X
Press the T button on the controller.
The seat settings menu is shown.
X
To select the required seat function: turn and
press the controller.
X
To switch between Driver and Front
Passenger: slide 1 the controller.
Adjustment functions
Adjusting the backrest side bolsters
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Backrest Sides: turn and press
the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the seat contour in the lum-
bar region of the seat backrest
This function allows you to adjust the air cush-
ions in the lumbar region of the backrest (4-way
lumbar support).
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Lumbar: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To activate the setting element: press the
controller.
X
To change the setting: slide 4 or 1
the controller.
The change will be visible in the setting ele-
ment.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the seat cushion
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Seat Surface: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Adjusting the driving dynamics
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Dynamic Multicontour Seat:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
You can select:
R
OFF:
R
1: Level 1 (weak)
R
2: Level 2 (strong)
X
To select the setting: turn the controller.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Massage programs
Overview
You can select the following massage programs:
R
Relaxing Massage
46
Seats
Vehicle functions
Massage the entire back, rising waves, sooth-
ing downward movements
R
Activating Massage
Mobilizing massage and rising and descend-
ing dynamic waves
R
Classic Massage
Single and twin waves moving upwards
across the entire back
R
Mobilizing Massage
Mobilization via stronger single and twin
waves moving upwards across the entire back
Selecting a massage program
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Massage: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To select massage programs: turn and press
the controller.
The massage program runs for approximately
15 to 25 minutes, depending on the setting.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Seat heating balance
The balance function controls the distribution of
heat for the seat backrest and seat cushion.
The balance function influences the currently
set heating level of the seat heating (see the
vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
To select Seat Heating Balance: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To change the setting: turn the controller.
You will see the changes you have made in the
settings display.
The settings represent the following:
R
0 the backrest and seat cushion are evenly
heated according to the setting selected with
the seat heating button.
R
1 to 3 increasing the heat output to the seat
cushion is reduced one level at a time.
R
1 to 3 decreasing the heat output for the
backrest is reduced one level at a time.
X
To exit the menu: press the % button.
Resetting all adjustments
X
Call up the seat functions (Y page 46).
X
Select a seat.
X
To select Reset: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a seat: slide 1 the controller.
X
To reset: press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select No
the process is canceled.
After selecting Yes
all seat adjustments are
reset to the default values (factory setting).
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle and assists you, for
instance when parking or at exits with reduced
visibility.
The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that no persons or animals are in the maneu-
vering range.
Further information on the 360°camera can be
found in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the 360° camera image
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
R
the 360° Camera function is switched on (see
the vehicle Operator's Manual)
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Select 360° Camera.
The 360° camera image appears in split-
screen mode.
You will see the previous view on the display if,
when the function is switched on:
R
you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
ignition lock
R
you select transmission position P
R
when you are driving at moderate speeds
360° camera
47
Vehicle functions
Z
Switching the display off manually
X
To select &: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
Switching the display on automatically
X
You can switch on the 360 camera display
automatically using the reverse gear
(
Y page 48).
Switching the 360° camera auto-
matic mode on/off
This function activates the 360° camera when
reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select 360° Camera: turn and press the
controller.
The 360° Camera
menu appears.
X
Select Activation by R gear.
The function is switched on O or off ª.
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the 360°
camera menu: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle exceeds a moderate speed
i
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, this
function is not available.
Rear view camera
General notes
The rear view camera covers the immediate sur-
roundings behind the vehicle and assists you
when parking.
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure
that there are no persons, animals or objects in
the maneuvering area while maneuvering and
parking in parking spaces.
There may be fewer settings depending on your
vehicle's equipment.
You can find further information about the rear
view camera in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching the rear view camera auto-
matic mode on/off
This function activates the rear view camera
when reverse gear is engaged.
X
Press the Ø button.
or
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select System Settings: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Rear View Camera.
The Rear View Camera
menu appears.
X
Select Activation by R gear.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
When you start the vehicle and engage
reverse gear, the area behind the vehicle is
shown with guide lines in the display. For fur-
ther information on the rear view camera; see
the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Opening the camera cover for clean-
ing
X
To select Open Camera Cover in the rear
view camera menu: turn and press the con-
troller.
The Please Wait...
message appears for
approximately three seconds.
The camera cover opens.
The camera cover closes automatically if:
R
the ignition is switched off
R
the vehicle pulls away
48
Rear view camera
Vehicle functions
DYNAMIC SELECT
General notes
Press DYNAMIC SELECT to configure the follow-
ing settings and values for the Individual drive
program:
R
Drive system
R
Suspension
R
Steering
R
Climate control
R
ECO start/stop function
i
In a few countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available regardless
of the display in the multimedia system dis-
play.
For Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can configure
the following settings and adjustment values for
the Individual drive program:
R
Drive system
R
Suspension
R
Transmission
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
There may be fewer settings or set values, or
none, depending on your vehicle's equipment.
For further information on the Individual drive
program; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Configuration using the DYNAMIC
SELECT button
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to select
the Individual drive program (see the vehicle
Operator's Manual).
A window appears after a short while.
X
To confirm Adjust: press the controller.
The Individual Configuration
menu for
setting the drive program appears.
X
To select Drive, Suspension, Steering,
Climate Control
or Eco Start/Stop
Function: turn and press the controller.
X
Select individual settings.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
Configuration via the DYNAMIC
SELECT controller
The DYNAMIC SELECT Controller is available for
Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to select
the Individual drive program; see the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
A window appears after a short while.
X
To confirm Adjust: press the controller.
The Individual Configuration
menu for
setting the drive program appears.
X
To select Drive, Suspension, Transmis‐
sion or ESP: turn and press the controller.
X
Select individual settings.
The menu symbol, text and image show the
selected setting.
Displaying vehicle data
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Vehicle Data.
Updates of the following data are displayed:
R
Road type analogous to the selected drive
program
R
G-force display of longitudinal and lateral
acceleration
R
Accelerator and brake pedal activity
R
Activity of the suspension struts
R
Wheel angle
R
Vehicle level display (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
The G-force display is not available in all of the
drive programs.
Daytime or night-time view is shown depending
on the automatic light sensor.
Displaying engine data
i
There may be fewer displays depending on
your vehicle's equipment.
DYNAMIC SELECT
49
Vehicle functions
Z
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select DYNAMIC SELECT: turn and press
the controller.
The Individual Configuration
and
Engine Data
menus appear.
X
Select Engine Data.
The following current data is displayed:
R
Engine output
R
Engine torque
R
Engine oil temperature
R
Transmission oil temperature (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
R
On-board electrical system voltage
i
The values for engine output and engine tor-
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for example:
R
Engine speed
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
Setting options
You can choose from the following settings for
the drive:
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport Plus
M Manual
E Eco
You can make the following settings for the sus-
pension:
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport Plus
You can make the following settings for the
steering:
C Comfort
S Sport
You can choose from the following settings for
climate control:
E Eco
C Comfort
You can choose from the following settings for
the ECO start/stop function:
On Switches the ECO
start/stop function
on
Off Switches the ECO
start/stop function
off
Setting options (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
You can choose from the following settings for
the drive:
R Race
C Comfort
S Sport
S+ Sport Plus
You can make the following settings for the sus-
pension:
C Comfort
S Sport
You can choose from the following settings for
the transmission:
D Automatic
M Manual
You can choose from the following settings for
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program):
S Sport
On
Activates ESP
®
(Elec-
tronic Stability Pro-
gram)
50
DYNAMIC SELECT
Vehicle functions
You can choose from the following settings for
the ECO start/stop function:
On Switches the ECO
start/stop function
on
Off Switches the ECO
start/stop function
off
Driving dynamics
General notes
In the Driving Dynamics menu you can call up
current vehicle and engine data. There may be
less or no data and displays depending on your
vehicle's equipment.
Displaying engine data
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Driving Dynamics: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Engine Data.
The following current data is displayed:
R
Engine output
R
Engine torque
R
Engine oil temperature
R
Transmission oil temperature (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles)
R
On-board electrical system voltage
i
The values for engine output and engine tor-
que may deviate from the nominal values.
Items that can influence this are, for example:
R
Engine speed
R
Sea level
R
Fuel grade
R
Outside temperature
Displaying vehicle data
X
Press Vehicle in the main function bar.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
To select Driving Dynamics: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Vehicle Data.
Updates of the following data are displayed:
R
Road type analogous to the selected drive
program
R
G-force display of longitudinal and lateral
acceleration
R
Accelerator and brake pedal activity
R
Activity of the suspension struts
R
Wheel angle
R
Vehicle level display (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
The G-force display is not available in all of the
drive programs.
Daytime or night-time view is shown depending
on the automatic light sensor.
Driving dynamics
51
Vehicle functions
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Introduction
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
merging lanes
R
parking or stopping in a no parking/no stop-
ping zone
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
R
narrow bridges
The multimedia system may provide incorrect
navigation recommendations if the actual
street/traffic situation does not correspond
with the digital map's data.
Examples of such deviations incl
ude:
R
a diverted route
R
a change in the direction of a one-way street
Digital maps do not cover all areas nor all routes
in an area.
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over the system's driving
recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
General notes
Operational readiness of the navigation
system
The navigation system must determine the posi-
tion of the vehicle before first use or whenever
operational status is restored. Therefore, you
may have to drive for a while before precise
route guidance is possible.
GPS reception
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
i
Using roof carriers may impair the correct
functioning of a roof antenna (phone, satellite
radio, GPS).
Entry restriction
For vehicles in certain countries, there is a data
entry restriction.
Entries can be made when the selector lever is in
position P or the vehicle is stationary.
When the restriction is active, certain entries
cannot be made. This will be indicated by the
fact that certain menu items are grayed out and
cannot be selected.
52
Introduction
Navigation
The following entries are not possible, for exam-
ple:
R
entering the destination city and street
R
POI entry via a name search
R
editing and saving of entries
Other entries are however possible, such as a
keyword search and entering POIs in the vicinity
of the destination or current position.
Switching to navigation mode
X
Press the ß button.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller (e.g. in radio mode).
X
To select Navi, turn and press the controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X
To call up the map while navigation mode
is switched on: press the ß button in any
menu.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
Showing/hiding the menu
Using the menu, you can make a destination
entry or select the navigation settings, for exam-
ple.
X
To show: slide 6 the controller when the
map appears.
If there has been no route calculated, Des‐
tination is marked.
If a route has been calculated, y is
marked.
X
To hide: press the % button.
or
X
Slide 5 the controller.
Full screen symbol : appears.
X
Press the controller.
Moving the map
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the
menu is faded out (
Y page 53).
X
Press the controller.
The crosshair is shown.
X
Slide 1, 4 or 2 the controller.
The map moves in the corresponding direc-
tion under the crosshair.
X
Press the controller to show the menu.
X
Select Menu.
Introduction
53
Navigation
Z
Basic settings
Selecting the route type
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Route Settings: press the con-
troller.
X
To select the route type: turn and press the
controller.
A filled circle indicates the current selection.
R
With active route guidance, the navigation
system calculates a new route.
Route guidance active: a destination has
been entered and the route has been cal-
culated.
R
If there has been no route calculated, the
navigation system uses the selection as the
new basic setting.
Fast Route
The navigation system calcu-
lates a route with a short jour-
ney time.
Dynamic
Traffic
Route
Based on the Fast Route
route type and includes traf-
fic reports on the route for the
route guidance.
Dynamic
TRF. Route
After
Request
If there are traffic reports, a
prompt appears asking
whether these reports should
be considered in the route
calculation.
Eco Route
The navigation system calcu-
lates an economic route. The
journey may take slightly lon-
ger compared to taking the
fast route.
Short
Route
The navigation system calcu-
lates a route with a short dis-
tance.
The route types Dynamic Traffic Route and
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request
use
real-time traffic reports from SIRIUS satellite
radio.
Further Information on real-time traffic reports
(
Y page 76).
X
To calculate alternative routes: select
Calculate Alternative Routes
.
Switch the function on O or off ª.
Function activated: after each route calcula-
tion, route alternatives are offered that cor-
respond to the local conditions (
Y page 74).
If desired, you can have the navigation system
calculate alternative routes even during route
guidance (
Y page 74).
Setting route options
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Route Settings: press the con-
troller.
54
Basic settings
Navigation
X
To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
A menu appears.
X
Select one of the options.
O: using or avoiding route options is enabled
ª: using or avoiding route options is disabled
R
Avoid Area (Y page 85)
You can define areas that you would like to
avoid.
R
Avoid Highways
R
Avoid Ferries
R
Avoid Auto Trains
R
Avoid Tunnels
R
Avoid Unpaved Roads
The function is not available in all countries.
R
Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
If your vehicle meets the access conditions
for carpool lanes, you can use this function.
Navigation includes carpool lanes if the car-
pool lanes option is activated.
Depending on local conditions, the navigation
system may not always be able to include all
route options. A route may include a ferry, for
instance, even though Avoid Ferries
is ena-
bled. The navigation system will notify you of
this visually and through a navigation message.
X
To use toll roads: turn and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Select an option.
The options include using roads that require
cash payment or electronic billing, or switch-
ing off the function.
X
To exit a menu: slide 1 the controller.
Selecting announcements
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Settings.
X
Select an option.
Switch the option on O or off ª.
Announce
Street
Names
The navigation system announ-
ces the names of the roads
onto which the upcoming
change of direction leads.
Audio
Fadeout
The volume of an active media
source is automatically
reduced during a navigation
announcement.
Audible
Info Dur‐
ing Phone
Call
The navigation message is also
given during telephone calls.
Gas on
Reserve
Function activated: once the
reserve fuel tank level is
reached, a message appears to
help you start a gas station
search.
Atten‐
tion
Assist
Function activated: if ATTEN-
TION ASSIST displays a warn-
ing in the multifunction display,
a message appears in the mul-
timedia system display when
you drive onto a highway. This
can help you start a rest stop
search.
For further information on
ATTENTION ASSIST, see the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Basic settings
55
Navigation
Z
Using car pool lanes
You can include carpool lanes (HOV or car shar-
ing lanes) in the route calculation.
If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please observe
the applicable laws as well as the local and time
limitation conditions.
Carpool lanes may only be used under certain
conditions. They can normally be used when
there are two people in the vehicle. However,
there are also carpool lanes which can only be
used when there are three or more people in the
vehicle. In California, single drivers may also use
the carpool lanes if the vehicle's emission or
consumption values are below the prescribed
levels.
Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific
times (e.g. during the peak period).
Carpool lanes are indicated by a diamond sym-
bol on specific road signs and on the road sur-
face. The road signs may also include the des-
ignation CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a
separate lane next to the others or are built as a
physically separate lane.
Depending on the setting under Number of
Occupants in the Vehicle:, the navigation
system uses carpool lanes when calculating the
route. During route guidance, visual and audible
driving directions provide guidance into and out
of carpool lanes.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Number of Occupants in the
Vehicle:.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
To select the number: turn and press the con-
troller.
Destination entry
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Destination entry may be blocked while driving,
depending on the country specifications.
Using an address
Calling up the address entry menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Address Entry.
Address entry options
Examples of how you can enter an address:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
city or ZIP code, street
56
Destination entry
Navigation
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
city or ZIP code, street, intersection
R
street, city or ZIP code, house number
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
The address can be entered faster by entering
the street before the city if the address has an
unusual street name.
While entering an address in the character bar,
you can call up other destination entry options:
R
keyword search using è (Y page 59)
R
the map via Map (Y page 63)
R
POIs via POIs (Y page 61)
Entering an address
The example shows you how to enter a city,
street and house number for an address, e.g. for
your home address.
X
In the address entry menu, select Street:
press the controller (
Y page 56).
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
ted is at the top of the list.
X
Enter BROADWAY. Character entry (Y page 30).
X
To call up the list: slide 5 the controller
repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
or
X
To select the ¬ symbol: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Town: press the controller.
X
Enter the city, e.g. New York. Then call up the
list and select an entry. Proceed in the same
way as when entering a street.
X
To select No.: press the controller.
X
Enter the house number. Then call up the list
and select an entry. Proceed in the same way
as when entering a street.
The address entry menu shows the address.
The city in which the vehicle is currently located
(current vehicle position) is at the top of the list
of cities. When destinations are entered using
the character bar, the locations for which route
guidance has already been carried out are more
prominently available.
You can enter any of the cities, streets, ZIP
codes, etc. which are stored in the digital map.
However, ZIP codes are not available for some
countries.
State/province and city are sufficient to start
navigating. You can enter either a city or a ZIP
code. The street and house number complete
the destination address.
Entering additional address data
You can enter additional address data:
R
State/province
You can use Last Used
to select the last
selected state (USA) or province (Canada).
You can also select Mexico and The Bahamas.
R
ZIP code
Entering a ZIP code will delete a previously
entered city.
R
Center
Entering a center will delete a previously
entered street.
R
Intersection
Entering an intersection will delete a previ-
ously entered house number.
Destination entry
57
Navigation
Z
X
Select the address entry menu (Y page 56).
X
To select State/Province, ZIP Code, Cen‐
ter or Intersection: turn, slide 6 and
press the controller.
X
Select an entry (Y page 57).
Saving an address
You can store the address entered as:
R
a home address in the address book
R
a navigable address book contact
For further information on the address book,
see (
Y page 105)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 80)
X
Call up the address entry menu (Y page 56).
X
To select Save: slide 6, turn and press the
controller.
X
As the home address: select As "My
Address".
The home address is stored in the list of con-
tacts under the entry My Address
.
X
As a contact: select As New Contact.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
X
Enter a surname and first name (Y page 30).
X
To select the¬ symbol: turn and press the
controller.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
Starting route calculation
The entered destination appears in the address
entry menu.
X
To confirm Start or Continue: press the
controller.
If you select Start
: the route is calculated
with the current route settings (
Y page 54).
While route calculation is in progress, an
arrow will indicate the direction to your des-
tination. Once the route has been calculated,
route guidance begins. If the vehicle is trav-
eling on a non-digitized road, the system dis-
plays the linear distance to the destination,
the direction to the destination and the Road
Not Mapped message.
Selection Continue
: If Calculate Alter‐
native Routes is activated, alternative
routes are calculated (
Y page 54). You can
display these and select them for route guid-
ance (
Y page 74).
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
To select Cancel Active Route Guidance
or Set as Intermediate Destination:
turn and press the controller.
Cancel Active Route Guidance
cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate Destination
adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
58
Destination entry
Navigation
i
The route is calculated using the digital map
data. The calculation time depends on the
distance from the destination, for example.
The route may differ from the ideal route, e.g.
due to incomplete map data. Please also refer
to the notes about the digital map
(
Y page 87).
Keyword search
Entering keywords
The keyword search is used to help find desti-
nations using fragments of words. If you enable
the appropriate setting in the search options,
the keyword search is tolerant of errors
(
Y page 60).
It can be used for an address or a POI. For exam-
ple, you can search for the Empire State Building
in New York.
The keyword search finds geographically toler-
ant hits. If, for example, you are searching for a
street located on the edge of a major city, the
search will also cover adjacent smaller cities.
The keyword search supports the character sets
of the system languages available.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
Enter the first few letters of the city and
street, e.g. NEW
and EMP.
While entering the information, the number of
exact matches and total number of matches
is shown.
---/---
is displayed if fewer than three char-
acters have been entered.
999+
is displayed if there are too many hits.
X
Select the ¬ symbol.
The search results are displayed
(
Y page 59).
Selecting search results
The search results are divided into categories,
such as addresses. The number of exact
matches and total number of matches is shown
in brackets.
Further search results are displayed, if POI
Search and/or Fuzzy Search are activated in
the search options (
Y page 60).
X
To select an address: press the controller.
The search results are displayed.
Exact hits are shown at the very top of the list.
Hits are listed alphabetically. The search term
that you entered is highlighted in orange in the
entries.
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
Destination entry
59
Navigation
Z
X
To select POI: select POIs in the Vicin‐
ity or All POIs by turning and pressing con-
troller.
A list appears. The search results are dis-
played according to the linear distance, start-
ing with those closest.
X
Select a POI.
The POI is shown.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
X
To select online search: select Online
Search by turning and pressing the control-
ler.
The search switches to the online functions.
Online search requirement (USA): mbrace
must be activated for Internet access
(
Y page 124).
Requirement for the online map display (Can-
ada): a mobile phone is connected to the mul-
timedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92)
or USB (
Y page 157).
Selecting search options
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select Search Options: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Fuzzy Search or POI Search.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
The error-tolerant search is useful if parts of
the address are incomplete or the spelling is
unclear.
The POI search takes into account points of
interest in the search.
Selecting a state/province
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
To select State/Province: slide 5, turn
and press the controller.
The states or provinces are sorted alphabeti-
cally.
X
To select a state/province: turn and press the
controller.
Using online search
Requirement (USA): mbrace must be activated
for Internet access (
Y page 124).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 157).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Keyword Search.
X
Enter the first few letters of the city and
street.
X
To select Online Search: slide 5, turn and
press the controller.
The search switches to the online functions.
Selecting a destination from the list of
last destinations
The last 50 destinations are stored automati-
cally.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Last Destinations.
60
Destination entry
Navigation
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
Selecting an address book contact as
a destination
You can select navigable address book contacts
as the destination. These are identified by the
L symbol. If you have already entered and
saved your home address, you can select this as
the destination by using My Address
.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Contacts.
X
Select the destination.
The address entry menu appears, showing the
contact and associated destination address.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
Selecting a destination from POIs
Calling up the POI menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From POIs.
Defining the position for the POI search
Selection Instructions
Near Destination
(when route guidance is
active)
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Near Destination: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Current Position
Searches in the vicinity of
the current vehicle posi-
tion.
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Current Position: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Destination entry
61
Navigation
Z
Selection Instructions
Other City
After entering a city, the
search is performed
within the city's bounda-
ries
Option 1
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Other City: turn and press the controller.
X
Select the state/province (Y page 57), if desired.
X
Enter the city (Y page 57).
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Option 2
X
Enter a city in the address entry menu (Y page 57).
X
To select POIs: slide 6, turn and press the controller.
X
Select a POI category (Y page 62).
Search By Name
Searches for all POIs on
the digital map or around
one of the three previ-
ously specified positions
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Search By Name: turn and press the controller.
X
Select All POIs or one of the three previously selected positions.
The POI list with character bar appears.
X
Enter a name.
or
X
To select Mercedes-Benz Service: turn and press the controller.
Search By Phone Num‐
ber
All POIs with a telephone
number can be selected.
X
Call up the POI menu (Y page 61).
X
To select Search By Phone Number: turn and press the control-
ler.
You will see a list of phone numbers.
X
Enter the telephone number.
The telephone number consists of:
R
the country code (international dialing code)
R
the area code
When entering the area code, omit the leading "0"
R
the telephone number of the participating caller
Selecting a POI category
POI categories appear after choosing the menu
items Near Destination
, Current Position
and after entering another city.
62
Destination entry
Navigation
X
Turn and press the controller.
The G symbol after an entry shows that fur-
ther categories are available.
X
Select a sub-category.
The POI search covers a 240 mi (400 km)
radius around the selected position.
Once the search is completed, the POI list is
displayed.
The search results display the following infor-
mation:
R
an arrow that shows the linear direction to
the POI (search around vehicle position)
R
the linear distance to the POI
R
the name of the POI
X
Select a POI.
The complete address of the POI is shown.
Selecting a POI
Requirement for "Calling up a POI": a mobile
phone must be connected to the multimedia
system (
Y page 92).
Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the
destination" and "Loading data from the Inter-
net" (USA): mbrace must be activated for Inter-
net access (
Y page 124).
Requirements for "Viewing the vicinity of the
destination" and "Loading data from the Inter-
net" (Canada): a mobile phone must be connec-
ted to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 157).
The complete address of the POI is shown.
X
To view the vicinity of the destination:
select : by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
If street images are available, the street in the
vicinity of the destination address is shown.
X
To call up the map: select Map.
X
Move the map, change the map scale and
select the POI (
Y page 63).
X
To call up a POI: select Call.
If a phone number is available, the multimedia
system switches to the telephone function.
X
To load data from the Internet: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loa-
ded from the Internet.
X
To store a POI: select Save.
The POI can be saved as:
R
home address
R
navigable address book contact
(
Y page 105)
R
personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 80)
X
To start route calculation: to select Start
or Continue: turn and press the controller.
If Calculate Alternative Routes
is ena-
bled in the basic settings, the menu item
Continue
is displayed instead of
Start
(Y page 54).
Using the map
:
Crosshair
;
Distance of crosshair position from current
vehicle position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Using Map.
The map with crosshair is shown.
X
To move the map: slide 1, 4 or 2
the controller.
X
To change the map scale: turn the controller
until the desired map scale is selected.
The scale is displayed at the bottom of the
display.
Destination entry
63
Navigation
Z
To enlarge the map: turn the controller coun-
ter-clockwise.
To zoom the map out: turn the controller
clockwise.
X
To select a destination: press the controller.
If several destinations are available in the
area around the crosshair, these are dis-
played. The list may show the Menu
menu
item.
X
Press the controller to show the menu.
X
To select a destination from the selection list:
turn and press the controller.
If the digital map provides navigable address
data, you will see the destination address in
the address entry menu.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
Entering intermediate destinations
Introduction
You can also map the route to the destination
yourself by entering up to four intermediate des-
tinations. The sequence of the intermediate des-
tinations can be changed at any time.
The multimedia system provides a selection of
eight predefined POI categories, e.g. Restau‐
rants for a quick selection. You can also use the
destination entry options to enter intermediate
destinations.
Creating intermediate destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Intermediate Destinations.
X
To select a POI category or Other : turn and
press the controller.
After selecting one of the eight POI catego-
ries, available POIs are displayed:
R
along the route
R
in the vicinity
The multimedia system first searches for des-
tinations on the route. The search for desti-
nations is then initiated in the area around the
current vehicle position.
X
After selecting Other, select one of the des-
tination entry options.
Selection Step
Address Entry
X
Enter a destination by
address (
Y page 57).
Keyword
Search
X
Select a destination
using a keyword search
(
Y page 59).
From Last
Destinations
X
Select a destination
from the list of last des-
tinations (
Y page 60).
From Contacts
X
Select a contact from
the address book as the
destination (
Y page 61).
From POIs
X
Select a point of interest
(
Y page 61).
Using Map
X
Enter a destination using
the map (
Y page 63).
From Memory
Card
X
Select a personal POI
(
Y page 68).
From
Mercedes-
Benz Apps
X
Enter a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
(
Y page 66).
Using Geo-
Coordinates
X
Enter a destination using
the geo-coordinates
(
Y page 66).
64
Destination entry
Navigation
X
To select a POI: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
After selecting a POI or entering a destination,
the address of the intermediate destination is
displayed.
After entering a destination using the map,
the address entry menu is displayed. Start
is
highlighted.
X
To call up a map: select Map by turning and
pressing the controller.
You can move the map and select the desti-
nation.
X
To make a call: select Call.
If the intermediate destination has a tele-
phone number and a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system
(
Y page 92), the call is connected.
X
To load data from the Internet: select www.
If an Internet address is available, data is loa-
ded from the Internet.
X
To store an intermediate destination in
the destination memory: select Save
(Y page 80).
X
To accept an intermediate destination:
select OK
by pressing the controller.
The destination is entered in the intermediate
destinations menu. Start Route Guidance
is highlighted.
X
To enter another intermediate destina-
tion: slide 5 the controller and highlight
Add New:
.
X
Press the controller.
X
Proceed as described above.
Editing intermediate destinations
The following editing options are available:
R
You can change intermediate destinations.
R
You can switch the sequence of the inter-
mediate destinations in the intermediate des-
tinations menu.
R
You can delete intermediate destinations.
X
To select an intermediate destination in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To change an intermediate destination:
select Edit
in the menu.
X
Select a new intermediate destination from a
category or via Other
.
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The intermediate destinations menu appears
and displays the changed intermediate desti-
nation.
You can change the order of the intermediate
destinations entered and the destination. To
change the order, at least one intermediate des-
tination and the destination must have been
entered.
X
To change the order: in the menu, select
Move
.
X
Turn the controller and move the intermediate
destination or destination to the desired posi-
tion.
X
Press the controller.
X
To delete an intermediate destination:
select Delete
in the menu.
Destination entry
65
Navigation
Z
Accepting intermediate destinations
for the route
X
To select Start Route Guidance in the
intermediate destinations menu: press the
controller.
The route is calculated with the entered inter-
mediate destinations.
If Calculate Alternative Routes
is ena-
bled in the basic settings, the Continue
menu
item is displayed (
Y page 54).
If an intermediate destination was passed
during route guidance, a green tick mark will
be entered in the intermediate destinations
menu. Once the route has been recalculated,
the intermediate destination is deleted from
the intermediate destinations menu.
Saving as a personal route
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
The route is saved on the SD card under Per
sonal Routes.
Searching for a gas station when the
fuel level is low
Requirement: the setting Gas on Reserve must
be enabled (
Y page 55).
If the fuel tank reserve level is displayed, you will
see the Reserve Fuel Would you like to
start a search for surrounding gas
stations? message.
X
To select Yes or No: turn and press the con-
troller.
If you select Yes
: the gas station search
starts. When the search is complete, a list of
the gas stations available along the route or in
the vicinity is displayed.
If you select No
: the search is canceled.
X
Select the gas station.
The address of the gas station is displayed.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The gas station selected is set in the inter-
mediate destinations menu as the next inter-
mediate destination not yet reached. Route
guidance begins.
Entering a destination from
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Requirement (USA): mbrace is activated for the
Mercedes-Benz Apps (
Y page 124).
Requirement (Canada): a mobile phone is con-
nected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or USB (Y page 157).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Mercedes-Benz Apps.
The list of Mercedes-Benz Apps appears.
Using geo-coordinates
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Using Geo-Coordinates.
Geo-coordinates are entered in degrees,
minutes and seconds.
X
To enter the latitude and longitude coor-
dinates: turn the controller to change the
value.
X
To move the selection within the line: slide
1 the controller.
X
To move the selection between lines: slide
4 the controller.
X
To confirm the value: press the controller.
X
To save a destination: to select Save: turn
and press the controller.
The destination can be stored as:
R
a home address in the address book
R
a navigable address book contact
For further information on the address
book, see (
Y page 105)
R
a personal destination on the SD card
(
Y page 80)
Starting route calculation
X
To select Start Route Guidance: turn and
press the controller.
66
Destination entry
Navigation
Personal POIs and routes
General notes
The use of personal POIs for displaying traffic
surveillance equipment is not permitted in every
country. Please observe the country-specific
regulations and always drive at a suitable speed.
Personal POIs are filed in categories:
R
Not Classified
Standard entry for personal POIs
R
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Personal POIs (destinations, routes) that you
have imported via the online functions
R
Categories which you have created yourself,
e.g. on your PC
Personal routes are not categorized.
Settings for personal POIs
Displaying on the map
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 148).
All personal POIs of the selected category are
displayed on the map with a corresponding sym-
bol.
If the "Alert when approaching" function
(
Y page 67) is activated, the symbols are dis-
played up to a map scale of 2 km (2 mi).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Display on the Map.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
All personal POIs in the selected category are
displayed O or not displayed ª, depending
on the previous status.
Alert when approaching
Requirements: an SD card with personal POIs is
inserted (
Y page 148).
If the vehicle is approaching a personal POI and
the functions are enabled, the personal POI is
highlighted on the map and an audible signal
sounds.
For this purpose, both the corresponding func-
tion Approaching POI Cue
and the category
containing the personal POI must be activated.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Personal POIs.
X
Select Approaching POI Cue.
The menu displays the categories available on
the SD card.
X
Select Audible or Optical.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª, for
all personal POIs of this category, depending
on the previous setting.
Saving personal POIs and routes
General notes
Personal POIs and routes are geodata which are
saved in open GPX format (GPS Exchange for-
mat) on the SD card.
Personal POI from current vehicle posi-
tion or crosshair position
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
When the map is displayed, press the con-
troller until a message appears.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
Not Classified
category on the SD card
and also stored in the "Last destinations"
memory (
Y page 81).
If the "Move map" function is selected
(
Y page 53), the crosshair position is saved.
i
If no SD card is inserted, the personal POI
will only be stored in the "Last destinations"
memory.
Personal POIs and routes
67
Navigation
Z
Personal POI from destination address
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
Call up the address entry menu and enter the
destination address (
Y page 56).
X
To select Save: slide 6 the controller.
X
Turn and press the controller.
X
To select To Memory Card: turn and press
the controller.
X
Enter the name.
The current address is saved in the Not
Classified category on the SD card.
i
You can select a destination from the From
Last Destinations or From Contacts
memories and save it on the SD card.
R
From Last Destinations (Y page 60)
R
From Contacts (Y page 61)
Personal route from a tour including
intermediate destinations
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
Enter a destination, e.g. by address
(
Y page 56).
X
Start route calculation (Y page 58).
X
Create intermediate destinations (Y page 64).
X
To select Save As Personal Route in the
intermediate destinations menu: turn and
press the controller.
The route is saved in the Personal Routes
folder on the SD card.
Importing personal POIs and routes
via Mercedes-Benz Apps
You can use Mercedes-Benz Apps (e.g. Down-
load POI) to import destinations to the naviga-
tion system. These have their own symbol and
are filed in the Mercedes-Benz Apps
category.
You can save the imported destinations and
routes as personal POIs and routes (
Y page 67).
When importing routes, please note:
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps may generate a
route based on a different map from the one
used by the multimedia system. Points on the
route may therefore be situated off the digital
roads.
R
The Mercedes-Benz Apps minimize the num-
ber of route points offered.
For this reason an imported route com-
menced in the multimedia system may devi-
ate from the original route from the
Mercedes-Benz Apps.
Selecting and editing personal POIs
and routes
Selecting
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
To select a category or Personal Routes:
turn and press the controller.
The available personal POIs or route entries
are displayed.
X
Select personal POI or personal route.
The address of the personal POI appears or
the personal route is displayed in the map.
If a large number of entries are stored, a register
for quick selection appears. Personal POIs and
routes can be stored with different character
sets (e.g. Latin, Cyrillic, Arabic).
X
To select a register: slide 9 the control-
ler.
X
Select a character by turning the controller.
Editing
The example shows a personal route.
68
Personal POIs and routes
Navigation
X
Select personal POI or personal route
(
Y page 68).
X
To explore a personal POI or route: slide
5 and press the controller to select Map
.
The map with the crosshair appears and
shows the destination.
X
Scroll the map (Y page 53).
X
Set the map scale (Y page 82).
X
To return to the menu: press the % button.
X
To call the personal POI: turn and press the
controller to select Call
.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system and the telephone number is
available, the call is connected (
Y page 98).
X
To change the name: turn and press the
controller to select Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
To change name: enter character (Y page 30).
X
To delete a personal POI or route: turn and
press the controller to select Delete
.
A prompt will appear.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, the personal destination or
personal route is deleted.
X
To select the outward and return routes:
select Swap
by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
The starting and destination positions of your
personal route, and thus the direction for
route guidance, are switched round. One-way
streets or restricted intersections are taken
into consideration. Therefore, the outward
and return routes may differ from each other.
X
To save a personal POI: turn and press the
controller to select Save
.
X
Continue saving (Y page 80).
X
To start route guidance: select Start by
turning and pressing the controller.
Recording the route
General notes
When recording the route, bear in mind the fol-
lowing:
R
If the SD card is inserted, it must not be
removed during recording.
R
If route recording is started manually, it must
be finished manually before the multimedia
system is switched off.
R
The multimedia system minimizes the num-
ber of route points recorded. Therefore when
the recorded route is subsequently com-
menced, it may differ from the route that was
originally recorded.
Starting/finishing route recording
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Start Route Recording.
The route is recorded and REC
appears at the
bottom edge of the screen.
X
To stop recording, select End Route
Recording from the menu.
The route is stored under Personal Routes
.
Displaying/editing the recorded route
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
Personal POIs and routes
69
Navigation
Z
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Memory Card.
X
Select Personal Routes.
Previously recorded routes are displayed.
X
To select a route: turn and press the control-
ler.
The map appears with a menu. The recorded
route is shown on the map in blue.
X
To start route calculation: select Start .
X
To change the name and symbol: select
Edit
.
X
Select Change Name or Edit Icon.
X
To change name: enter character (Y page 30).
X
To change symbol: select a symbol.
The symbol is saved.
Route guidance
General notes
Always observe the traffic regulations when
driving. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over system driving recom-
mendations.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking account of the
following, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
temporary traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give differing navi-
gation commands if the actual street/traffic sit-
uation does not correspond with the digital
map's data. For example, if the road layout or
the direction of a one-way street has been
changed.
Route guidance begins once a route has been
calculated (
Y page 58).
The multimedia system guides you to your des-
tination by means of navigation announcements
in the form of audible navigation announce-
ments and route guidance displays.
Navigation messages guide you during the jour-
ney without distracting you from traffic condi-
tions or driving. Please always use this feature
instead of consulting the map display for direc-
tions. The symbols or the map display could dis-
tract you from traffic conditions and driving.
The route guidance displays can be seen if nav-
igation mode is switched on.
If you do not follow the navigation announce-
ments or if you leave the calculated route, the
multimedia system automatically calculates a
new route to the destination.
If the digital map contains the corresponding
information, the following applies:
R
During route guidance, the multimedia sys-
tem tries to avoid roads with restricted
access. These include, for example, roads
which are closed to through-traffic.
R
Roads that have time restrictions (e.g. closed
on Sundays and public holidays) are consid-
ered for route guidance on days when they are
open. For this purpose, the relevant times
must be correctly stored in the database.
Change of direction
Overview
Changes of direction have three phases:
R
Preparation phase
R
Announcement phase
R
Change-of-direction phase
Changes in direction are also shown in the mul-
tifunction display of the instrument cluster (see
the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Preparation phase
The multimedia system prepares you for the
upcoming driving maneuver, e.g. with the
announcement "Prepare to turn right". You see
the full-screen map.
70
Route guidance
Navigation
Announcement phase
:
Point at which the change of direction takes
place (white dot)
;
Change of direction (turn right here)
=
Distance to the next change of direction
The multimedia system announces the immi-
nent change of direction. The change of direc-
tion is announced ahead of time, with the
announcement "Turn right in 300 meters", for
example.
The display is now split into two sectors. The
map is shown on the left side of the display, and
a detailed image of the intersection or a 3D
image of the imminent change of direction is
shown on the right side of the display.
Change-of-direction phase
The multimedia system announces the immedi-
ate change of direction. The change of direction
is announced ahead of time, e.g. with the
announcement "Now turn right".
The display is split in two like in the announce-
ment phase.
The change of direction is performed when the
light-colored bar on the right drops down to 0 ft
and the current vehicle position symbol has
reached the white change-of-direction point.
When the change of direction is completed, the
map will appear in full screen mode again.
Display on highways
The image shows an example of route guidance
at a highway intersection when driving on a
highway.
Lane recommendations
Display on multi-lane roads
:
Lanes not recommended (dark gray)
;
Possible lane (light gray)
=
Recommended lanes (white)
If the digital map contains the relevant data, the
multimedia system can display lane recommen-
dations on multi-lane roads for the next change
of direction.
Lane not recommended :: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Possible lane ;: you will be able to complete
the next change of direction in this lane.
Recommended lane =: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next change of direction
and the one after that.
Route guidance
71
Navigation
Z
Lane recommendations are also shown in the
multifunction display of the instrument cluster
(see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Approaching new lanes
:
Approaching new lane
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added. These will be shown in the display of
lane recommendations with a lower boundary
line.
Highway information
Display mode
Requirement: the Highway Information map
content must be enabled (
Y page 84).
While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest
stops, rest areas and highway exits are dis-
played along with their immediate distances
from the current vehicle position.
Calling up the selection mode
X
When highway information is displayed, slide
9 the controller.
The marker is on the highway information. The
associated position is highlighted on the map.
X
To select the desired rest stop/freeway exit:
turn and press the controller.
The available POIs are displayed.
Starting route guidance to a POI
Highway information enables route guidance to
a POI and other functions.
X
To select a POI: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
The POI details are displayed.
You can perform the following functions:
R
Storing in the address book (Y page 80)
R
Saving to the SD card (Y page 80)
R
Viewing on the map (Y page 85)
R
Calling if a mobile phone is connected and
a phone number is available (
Y page 98)
R
USA: viewing the vicinity of the destination
if street images are available and mbrace is
activated for Internet access
(
Y page 124)
R
Canada: viewing the vicinity of the destina-
tion if street images are available and a
72
Route guidance
Navigation
mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or
USB (
Y page 157)
R
USA: downloading data from the Internet if
an Internet address is available and mbrace
is activated for Internet access
(
Y page 92)
R
Canada: downloading data from the Inter-
net if an Internet address is available and a
mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or
USB (
Y page 157)
R
Selecting for route guidance and calculate
a route to it (
Y page 58)
Using the traffic jam function
Highway information enables the use of the traf-
fic jam function. The remaining route on the
highway in this case is blocked in the direction of
travel from the selected exit.
X
To select Detour: turn and press the control-
ler.
The traffic jam function appears
(
Y page 75).
Destination reached
Once the destination is reached, you will see the
checkered flag. Route guidance is finished.
Navigation announcements
Repeating navigation announcements
If you missed the current navigation announce-
ment, you can call it up again.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select +: turn and press the controller.
i
If you previously assigned the Repeat Spo‐
ken Driving Recomm. function to the Favor-
ites button, you can select the function using
the Favorites button instead (
Y page 41).
Setting the volume manually
X
During a navigation announcement, turn the
q control knob.
i
When you start the engine, the volume will
be at its lowest setting.
Switching navigation announcements
on/off
X
To deactivate navigation announcements:
during a navigation announcement, press the
8 button on the control panel.
or
X
During a navigation announcement, press the
8 button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The Spoken driving recommendations
have been deactivated. message
appears.
X
To switch navigation announcements
back on: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select +: turn and press the controller.
The multimedia system automatically switches
the navigation announcements back on when:
R
a new route is calculated
R
the multimedia system is switched back on
R
the vehicle is started
A navigation message is given if the route is
recalculated during dynamic route guidance due
to new traffic reports (
Y page 76).
Route guidance
73
Navigation
Z
Canceling/continuing route guidance
Canceling route guidance
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu is shown.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Cancel Route Guidance.
The blue route line is no longer shown on the
map.
Resuming route guidance
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu is shown.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Continue Route Guidance.
The multimedia system calculates the route.
Route information
Destination information
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Destination Information.
The destination and existing intermediate
destinations are displayed with distances,
travel time and arrival time.
X
To select destination or intermediate des-
tination: turn and press the controller.
The address appears.
You can use these functions for the destina-
tion or intermediate destination:
R
Storing in the address book (Y page 80)
R
Saving to the SD card (Y page 80)
R
Viewing on the map (Y page 85)
R
Calling if a mobile phone is connected and
a phone number is available (
Y page 98)
R
USA: viewing the vicinity of the destination
if street images are available and mbrace is
activated for Internet access
(
Y page 124)
R
Canada: viewing the vicinity of the destina-
tion if street images are available and a
mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or
USB (
Y page 157)
R
USA: downloading data from the Internet if
an Internet address is available and mbrace
is activated for Internet access
(
Y page 92)
R
Canada: downloading data from the Inter-
net if an Internet address is available and a
mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) or
USB (
Y page 157)
Taking an alternative route
If the Calculate Alternative Routes setting
is activated O, different routes will be offered
each time a route is calculated (
Y page 54).
You can call up alternative routes to the current
route.
74
Route guidance
Navigation
Route 1 is calculated with the current settings
for the route type and route options and shown
with a dark blue line.
Routes 2 and 3 are alternatives to route 1 and
also displayed with a dark blue line.
Route 4 is the most economic route and is dis-
played with a green line.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Alternative Route.
Route 1 is shown.
X
To display additional routes: select Next or
Previous
.
X
To start a new route guidance: select
Start
.
Route list
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Route List.
The route list shows the next change of direc-
tion and the immediate distances from the
current vehicle position.
X
To display additional route sections: turn
the controller.
The position of the change of direction that
belongs to the respective route section is
indicated on the map with a cross.
Where am I?
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Where am I?.
The street you are currently on and the pre-
vious and next intersections are displayed.
Traffic jam function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Route: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Detour.
X
To specify the start of the traffic jam sec-
tion: select Beginning
.
The next possible traffic jam section starting
point is marked.
X
Turn the controller.
The marking moves along the route to the
next starting position.
X
Press the controller.
The start of the traffic jam is set.
Route guidance
75
Navigation
Z
X
To specify the end of a traffic jam section:
select End
.
The next possible traffic jam section end point
is marked.
X
Turn the controller.
The marking moves along the route to the
next end position.
X
Press the controller.
The end of the traffic jam is determined.
X
To calculate the detour: select Start.
Off-road
General notes
The multimedia system may guide you to off-
road routes that your vehicle cannot drive on
without causing damage to the tires and wheels,
or the vehicle itself. It is the driver’s sole respon-
sibility to determine the suitability of the route.
The state and navigability of off-road routes may
be influenced, for example, by factors such as
time of day, time of year and current weather
conditions. The multimedia system cannot
judge these factors or take them into account
for route guidance.
Route guidance to an off-road destina-
tion
The multimedia system can guide you to desti-
nations which are within the area of the digital
map, but which are not themselves on the map.
These destinations are known as off-road des-
tinations, which you can enter using the map, for
example. In these cases, the multimedia system
guides you for as long as possible with naviga-
tion announcements and displays on roads
known to the system.
If the vehicle reaches an area which is not part of
the digital map, the display appears as a split-
screen view. On the right, an arrow appears that
points to the off-road destination. You hear the
announcement: "Please follow the arrow on the
display". As the vehicle approaches the desti-
nation, you will see a display to this effect.
Route guidance from an off-road loca-
tion to a destination
Off-road location: the vehicle's position is on the
digital map, but the map does not contain any
information about that location. The multimedia
system is able to guide you to a destination even
from an off-road location.
At the start of route guidance, you will see the
Road Not Mapped
message, an arrow and the
distance to the destination. The arrow shows
the compass heading to the actual destination.
As soon as the vehicle is back on a road known
to the system, route guidance continues in the
usual way.
Off-road during route guidance
Due to road construction, for example, there
may be differences between the data on the
digital map and the actual course of the road.
In such cases, the system will temporarily be
unable to locate the vehicle position on the dig-
ital map. The vehicle is therefore in an off-road
position.
In the display, you will then see the Road Not
Mapped message, an arrow and the distance to
the destination. The direction arrow shows the
compass heading to the destination.
As soon as the system can assign the vehicle
position to the map again, route guidance con-
tinues in the usual way.
Real-time traffic reports
Requirements
In order to receive real-time traffic reports via
satellite radio, you need to subscribe to SIRIUS
XM Satellite Radio Traffic Message Service.
Further information on satellite radio
(
Y page 137).
The multimedia system can receive traffic
reports via satellite radio and take account of
these for route guidance in the navigation sys-
tem. Received traffic reports are displayed on
the map either as text or as symbols.
76
Real-time traffic reports
Navigation
Real-time traffic reports on the map
Traffic reports are shown on the map with sym-
bols and colored lines. The symbols indicate the
type of traffic report and the colored lines show
the extent of the area affected by the traffic
incident. The symbols are shown in map scales
from 1/32 miles (20 m) to 10 miles (10 km).
When : is displayed, traffic reports can be
received or traffic reports are available. If it is
not displayed, no reception is possible.
X
To hide the menu: slide 5 and press the
controller.
The map can be seen in the full-screen dis-
play.
X
To set the map scale: turn the controller
until the desired map scale is selected.
The legend shows the symbolic traffic mes-
sages on the map.
:
Traffic jam on the route
;
Slow-moving traffic on the route
=
Road blocked
?
Traffic jam
A
Traffic warning
B
Dashed red and white line delimiting the
traffic warning
C
Road block (red crosses along the affected
road)
D
Slow-moving traffic (orange line along the
affected route)
E
Traffic jam (red line along the affected route)
Displaying real-time traffic reports
Starting a search for traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To close the report: press the controller.
Traffic symbol information
:
Affected roads with indication of direction
;
Symbol for report type, e.g. traffic flow mes-
sage
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
Real-time traffic reports
77
Navigation
Z
X
To select Traffic Symbol Information:
turn and press the controller.
The map appears and shows the available
traffic information as icons. The first traffic
information is highlighted.
X
To highlight additional traffic symbols, select
Next
or Previous.
X
To move the map: select Map.
You can move the map to enable further traf-
fic information to be displayed.
You can have the traffic report relevant to a traf-
fic icon shown.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the affec-
ted direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic report
applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Displaying reports on the route
The function is only available while route guid-
ance is active. It shows the available traffic
reports affecting the current route.
If there are no reports for the route or the func-
tion is not supported in the selected language:
the Messages
On Route menu item is gray and
cannot be selected.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Messages On Route: turn and
press the controller.
The traffic report window appears. Several
traffic reports may be available for the calcu-
lated route, marked for example by 1/4.
The report shows the following information:
R
State/province, road and display of the
affected direction
R
Section of the road to which the traffic
report applies
R
Traffic icon and traffic report
X
To display the next/previous traffic
report: turn the controller.
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Displaying all traffic reports
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select All Messages: turn and press the
controller.
A list is shown containing all roads, areas or
regions affected by traffic reports. Roads,
areas or regions not on the route also appear
in the list.
78
Real-time traffic reports
Navigation
X
To select the road, area or region: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
The traffic report is displayed (
Y page 78).
There may be several traffic reports for the
affected road.
X
To close the display: press the % button.
Activating/deactivating traffic informa-
tion on the map
You can switch the following traffic information
on the map on/off:
R
Incidents
R
Speed & Flow
R
Free Flow
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Traffic Information On Map:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Incidents, Speed & Flow or Free
Flow.
The display is on O or off ª.
Reading out traffic reports on the
route
Introduction
The text reader function is only available while
route guidance is active. It reads out traffic
reports affecting the current route.
You can select from the following text reader
properties:
R
Language (Y page 41)
R
Text reader speed (Y page 37)
You can start the text reader function manually
or set it to automatic.
Starting the text reader function man-
ually
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Out All Messages on Route.
The multimedia system reads out the reports
in sequential order.
If there are no reports for the route, the Read
Out All Messages on Route menu item is
gray and cannot be selected.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: select
Cancel Read-Aloud Function
.
The multimedia system reads the current
report aloud and then exits the read-aloud
function.
Automatic text reader function
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Read Messages Automatically.
Depending on the previous state, switch the
option on O or off ª.
Recalculating the route dynamically
Route types Dynamic Traffic Route and
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request
take
into account all of the traffic reports they receive
for the current route when calculating the route
(
Y page 54).
If you have selected Dynamic Traffic Route
as the route type, the multimedia system guides
you to your destination along the updated route.
If you have selected the route type Dynamic
TRF. Route After Request, a prompt will first
appear.
You can now decide whether to:
R
accept the detour proposed by the multime-
dia system or
R
continue along the original route
X
To accept the proposed detour: press the
controller.
X
To reject the proposed detour and continue
with the original route: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The original route is continued.
Real-time traffic reports
79
Navigation
Z
Storing destinations
General notes
In the "Last destinations" memory, the following
are stored:
R
destinations and intermediate destinations
according to the route calculation
R
the current vehicle position or the crosshair
position, if these are saved
R
personal routes
If the memory is full, the oldest destination is
overwritten.
You can save destinations permanently in the
address book (
Y page 80) and on an SD card
(
Y page 80). For instance, this is possible
immediately after entering an address.
For further information on the address book, see
(
Y page 104)
Storing the destination in the address
book
Storing as a new contact
The example shows a POI.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select As New Contact.
X
Select Not Classified, Home or Work.
An input menu shows the destination
address.
X
Enter a surname and first name. Character
entry (
Y page 29).
X
To select OK: turn and press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is saved in the
address book as a navigable contact.
Adding to a contact
The example shows a POI.
Requirement: the address book contains con-
tacts.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Add to Contact.
The address book appears.
X
Search for a contact (Y page 105).
X
Press the controller.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination address is allocated to a con-
tact in the address book.
Telephone numbers are not transferred to the
telephone number fields of the address book.
After selecting the destination address from
the address book for navigation, the associ-
ated telephone number will be displayed.
If the contact already has two destination
addresses, a prompt will appear asking if a
destination address should be overwritten.
X
Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes
, a list showing both destina-
tion addresses appears.
X
To select the destination address: turn and
press the controller.
The destination address is overwritten.
Saving a destination to an SD card
X
Insert the SD memory card (Y page 148).
X
Display a POI, for example.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select To Memory Card.
X
Select Not Classified or, if available, select
a category that you have created yourself.
An input menu appears.
80
Storing destinations
Navigation
X
Enter a surname and first name. Character
entry (
Y page 30).
X
Select OK.
The Saving Successful
message appears.
The destination is saved to the SD card.
Saving the current vehicle position
Using the map
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
When the map is shown, press and hold the
COMAND controller until you hear a tone.
The current vehicle position is saved to the
"Last destinations" memory.
If an SD card is inserted, the current vehicle
position will also be saved in the Not Clas‐
sified category.
Using the menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
X
Store the destination in the address book
(
Y page 80).
X
Save the destination to the SD card
(
Y page 80).
Saving the crosshair position
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To display the crosshair: press the control-
ler.
X
Move the map to the desired position
(
Y page 53).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Save.
The current crosshair position is saved to the
"Last destinations" memory.
If an SD card is inserted, the current crosshair
position will also be saved in the Not Clas‐
sified category.
Editing the last destinations
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select From Last Destinations.
The "Last destinations" memory appears.
X
To save the destination: select the destina-
tion.
The destination address appears.
X
Store the destination in the address book
(
Y page 80).
X
Save the destination to the SD card
(
Y page 80).
X
To view the details: while in the "Last desti-
nations" memory, turn the controller and
highlight the entry.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Details: press the controller.
i
The destination address can be changed if
desired.
X
To delete one or all destinations: while in
the "Last destinations" memory, turn the con-
troller and highlight the entry.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
A menu appears.
Storing destinations
81
Navigation
Z
X
To select Delete or Delete All: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes or No.
Selecting Yes
deletes the selected destina-
tion or all destinations.
Map functions
General notes
Company logos displayed on the map are trade-
marks of the respective companies and used
solely for the purpose of indicating the locations
of these companies. The use of such logos on
the map does not indicate approval of, support
of or advertising by these companies for the
navigation system itself.
Map settings
Setting the map scale
Requirement: the map is in full screen mode, the
menu is faded out (
Y page 53).
The lower left-hand section of the map shows
the currently set map scale and compass nee-
dle.
Right-hand-drive vehicles: the currently set map
scale and compass needle are displayed in the
lower right-hand section of the map.
X
To show the map in full screen mode: to
hide the menu, push the % button.
or
X
Slide the controller to the center of the map
and press to confirm.
X
To set the map scale: as soon as you turn the
controller, the scale bar appears on the bot-
tom of the display.
X
Turn the controller until the needle points to
the desired map scale.
Once you are finished selecting a map scale,
the new map scale will be shown.
Selecting map orientation
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Orientation.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
The map orientation is set.
The image is an example of the 3D map display
with crosshair.
82
Map functions
Navigation
Change
map direc-
tion
Explanation
North Up
0 The map view is displayed
so that north is always up.
Heading Up
¤ The map view is aligned to
the direction of travel. The
direction of travel is always at
the top; the red tip of the sym-
bol points north.
3-D Map
¤ The map view is aligned to
the direction of travel. The
map displays a 3D oblique
view with elevation; the red tip
of the symbol points north.
Selecting POI symbols on the map
POIs can be displayed as symbols in the map
display. POIs include, for example, gas stations,
hotels and restaurants.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select POI Symbols On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Default Symbols
shows symbols of prede-
fined categories in the map.
Custom
Symbols allows symbols to be selec-
ted from other/all available categories.
X
Turn and press the controller.
You have the option of selecting symbols to
be displayed O or not displayed ª on the
map.
The list shows all symbols that are contained on
the digital map across all countries. However,
not all points of interest are available in all coun-
tries. As a result, certain point of interest sym-
bols may not be displayed on the map, even if
the symbol display is switched on.
Selecting text information on the map
At the bottom of the display, you can specify
whether to display geo-coordinates or not to
display text information for the street you are
currently on.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Text Information On Map.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Current
Street shows the current street at
the bottom of the display.
Geo-coordinates
shows the longitude and
latitude, elevation and number of satellites
received.
The elevation shown may deviate from the
actual elevation.
X
Turn and press the controller.
Displaying the range on the map
The range can be displayed on the map for elec-
tric vehicles. A circle appears around the current
vehicle position.
For further information on range, see the vehicle
Operator's Manual.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Range on Map.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Map functions
83
Navigation
Z
Switching highway information on/off
While driving on the highway, gas stations, rest
stops, rest areas and highway exits are dis-
played along with their immediate distances
from the current vehicle position (
Y page 72).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Highway Information.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Traffic Sign Assist
The function is available depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
The map shows traffic signs detected by Traffic
Sign Assist (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Traffic Sign Assist.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Displaying the next crossroads
If route guidance is not active, the next cross-
roads can be displayed at the upper edge of the
display.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Next Intersecting Street.
Switch the display in the map on O or off ª.
Showing the map version
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Map Content.
X
Select Map Version.
Information on the current map version is
shown. Information about new versions of the
digital map can be obtained from an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rotating the 3D map
You can use this function to explore the vicinity
of the destination in a 3D view. The function is
available in all map scales.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Position: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select 3D Map Rotation.
X
Turn the controller to change to the 3D map
perspective.
Additional functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 53)
84
Map functions
Navigation
Map display
Displaying the navigation map
The multimedia system shows the navigation
map in globe projection. This allows for a real-
istic map display free from distortion in all map
scales.
Satellite maps are shown in map scales from
2 miles to 1000 miles.
Other functions:
R
Moving the map (Y page 53)
R
Changing the map scale (Y page 82)
Building images
In small map scales (1/32 mile, 1/16 mile),
important buildings are depicted realistically on
the map. Other buildings are shown as models.
Avoiding an area
General notes
The multimedia system enables you to avoid
areas you do not wish to drive through.
If you activate or deactivate a route block while
route guidance is active, the multimedia system
will calculate a new route. If you activate or
deactivate a route block while route guidance is
inactive, the multimedia system will use the new
setting for the next route guidance.
The calculated route may include an area to be
avoided if:
R
your destination is located in such an area
R
there is no alternative route available
Highways within blocked areas are always taken
into consideration in the route calculation.
Avoiding a new area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
X
Select Avoid New Area.
A menu appears.
X
Select Using Map or Address Entry.
If you select Using Map
, the map with cross-
hair appears.
If you select Address Entry
, the address
entry menu appears where you can enter the
address (
Y page 56). The map appears with
the crosshair after the address is entered.
Map functions
85
Navigation
Z
X
To select an area: when the map with cross-
hair appears, press the controller.
A red square appears on the map, symbolizing
the area to be blocked.
X
To change the size of the area: turn the
controller.
The map scale is shown at the bottom of the
display. The needle points to the map scale
currently selected.
X
When the desired size is set, press the con-
troller.
The area is entered into the list.
Turning an area on/off and displaying/
changing the area
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X
To switch an area to avoid on/off: select an
area to mark by turning and pressing the con-
troller.
The area will be avoided O or not ª.
X
To display/change an area: mark an area by
turning the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Display/Change: press the con-
troller.
The map with the crosshair appears.
The area currently blocked is displayed as a
red square.
X
To move the area to a new location: slide
1, 4, 2 the controller.
X
To change the size of the area, press the con-
troller.
X
Turn the controller.
X
To apply the changes, press the controller.
A message appears stating that the area has
been set.
Deleting one/all areas
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Route Settings.
X
Select Avoid Options.
X
Select Avoid Area.
A list appears.
X
To delete an area: mark an area by turning
the controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Delete or Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete the area.
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, the area is deleted.
X
To delete all areas: when the list appears,
slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Delete All.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete all areas.
X
Select Yes or No.
After selecting Yes
, all areas are deleted.
86
Map functions
Navigation
SIRIUS XM service
Displaying SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion
You can display the SIRIUS XM service informa-
tion.
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
Ø button.
X
To show the menu: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Traffic: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select SIRIUS Service.
The provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)
and the serial number of your service module
are displayed.
Registering the SIRIUS XM service
X
Call the provider telephone number shown on
the multimedia system display.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS XM
Radio website at http://www.sirius.com
(USA).
Once the connection has been established:
X
Follow the service employee's instructions.
The activation process may take up to ten
minutes.
If registration is not included when purchasing
the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
Updating the digital map
Introduction
The digital maps generated by the map software
become outdated in the same way as conven-
tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can
only be provided by the navigation system in
conjunction with the most up-to-date map soft-
ware.
Information about new versions of the digital
map can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the digital
map updated there using a data medium, or you
can update it yourself.
For USA and Mexico, it is possible to update the
map data for the multimedia system free of
charge for a period of three years. Information
on the availability of this service for your vehicle
can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Entitlement to the free update
For the first three years after your vehicle is reg-
istered, you are entitled to all available updates
to the map software for the multimedia system.
They are usually installed during a regular vehi-
cle service. After this period, you can purchase
further updates from an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
The free updates relate to the vehicle and not to
an individual. If there is a change of ownership
within the three years after first registration, the
new owner is entitled to the map software
updates.
Updating at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center
If an update for your map software is available,
you will receive it free of charge at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center during your vehicle's
annual service. You can arrange a separate
appointment for this at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center on request.
The update can only be performed:
R
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
R
for navigation data for North America
The map software is not provided on DVD.
Carrying out a manual update
After the free update of the map data has
expired or when buying map data, you can
update the data yourself.
The update process may take some time (up to
45 minutes), depending on the size of the digital
map. The update will be completed more quickly
if the vehicle is stationary. If you begin the
update while the vehicle is stationary and the
starter battery has insufficient power, the mul-
timedia system may switch off automatically.
This protects the battery. In order to prevent
this, a suitable power supply to the vehicle must
be maintained.
Map functions
87
Navigation
Z
Navigation functions
Calling up the navigation system
menu
X
To switch to navigation mode: press the
ß button.
X
To show the menu: slide 5 the controller.
Navi
is highlighted in the main function bar.
X
Press the controller.
The navigation menu appears.
X
Turn the controller to display the navigation
functions one after another.
X
To switch to the map, turn the controller until
Navigation
appears and press the control-
ler.
Calling up the online map display
Online search requirement (USA): mbrace must
be activated for Internet access (
Y page 124).
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 88).
X
Turn the controller until Online Map Dis‐
play is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The online connection is established. Once
the connection is established, the Google
Maps™ map shows the vicinity of the current
vehicle position.
X
To exit the online map display: press the
% button.
Calling up the compass display
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 88).
X
Turn the controller until Compass is brought to
the front.
X
Press the controller.
The compass display provides the following
information:
R
The current direction of travel with bearing
(360 degree format) and compass direction
R
Longitude and latitude coordinates in
degrees, minutes and seconds
R
Height (rounded off) above sea level
R
Number of GPS satellites from which a sig-
nal can be received
X
To select Compass On Map: turn and press
the controller.
X
To exit the compass display: press the
% button.
Info on navigation
X
Call up the navigation menu (Y page 88).
X
Turn the controller until Info on Naviga‐
tion is brought to the front.
X
Press the controller.
The Digital Operator's Manual is opened at
the section on navigation.
88
Navigation functions
Navigation
Problems with the navigation system
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
does not resume route
guidance after the jour-
ney has been interrup-
ted.
Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more than
two hours.
"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.
"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching the multimedia sys-
tem back on and driving on.
X
Continue route guidance manually (Y page 74).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
is unable to determine
the vehicle's position.
The multimedia system must identify the vehicle’s position again after
it has been transported.
Example:
R
After transporting the vehicle by ferry
R
After transporting the vehicle by motorail
X
Start the vehicle and pull away.
The multimedia system calculates the vehicle's position. Depending
on the driving situation, this may take some time.
Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of the
vehicle's position.
When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with nav-
igation announcements and route guidance displays.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The digital map is not
compatible with the
vehicle software.
The data medium containing the digital map cannot be used for the
update.
X
To confirm the message: press the controller.
X
Remove the data medium.
X
Have the data medium checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The multimedia system
asks for an activation
code during the map
update.
The digital map is secured with an activation code.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Problems with the navigation system
89
Navigation
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The map software
update has failed.
The digital map can be installed with a DVD, SD card or USB stick.
X
Check the readability of the data medium, e.g. in a PC.
X
To restart the update: insert the DVD.
or
X
Insert an SD card or USB stick.
The multimedia system asks for an activation code during the map
update. The code must be validated in the vehicle.
X
Start the vehicle.
X
To restart the update: insert the DVD, SD card or connect a USB
device.
The multimedia system's integral hard disk has been physically dam-
aged.
X
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
90
Problems with the navigation system
Navigation
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
If you make a call on your mobile phone while
driving, always use hands-free mode. Only use
the mobile phone when road, weather and traffic
conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the driver from using a mobile phone while driv-
ing a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of 30 mph (approx-
imately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance
of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others.
There is scientific discussion surrounding the
possible health risks posed by electromagnetic
fields. You can reduce this risk by using an exte-
rior antenna.
Therefore, connect your mobile communica-
tions equipment to the vehicle's exterior
antenna wherever possible.
General notes
Telephony
The Bluetooth
®
interface on the multimedia sys-
tem is available for telephony.
If your mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
profile PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile), the
contacts are automatically displayed in the mul-
timedia system.
You can use the text message and e-mail func-
tions if your mobile phone supports the MAP
Bluetooth
®
profile (Message Access Profile).
Observe the other requirements for the e-mail
and text message functions (
Y page 113).
With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
hands-free system and receive vCards via the
Bluetooth
®
interface.
You can obtain more information about suitable
mobile phones on the Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Call disconnection while the vehicle is
in motion
A call may be disconnected if:
R
there is insufficient network coverage in cer-
tain areas.
R
you move from one transmitter/receiver area
(cell) into another and no channels are free.
R
you use a SIM card which is not compatible
with the network available.
Operating options
You can operate the telephone by:
R
using the controller:
turning
sliding 1 or 4
pressing
R
using the 6 or ~ button on the multi-
function steering wheel
R
using the Voice Control System (see the sep-
arate operating instructions)
General notes
91
Telephone
Z
Function restrictions
You may have to wait to use telephony via the
multimedia system in the following situations:
R
the mobile phone is switched off
R
Bluetooth
®
is switched off on the mobile
phone
R
the mobile phone has not logged on to a
mobile phone network
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off in
the multimedia system
The telephone automatically tries to log on to a
network. If no network is available, you may not
be able to make a "911" emergency call. If you
attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Ser
vice message will appear for a short while.
Telephone menu overview
:
Mobile phone network provider
;
Signal strength of the mobile phone network
=
Receiver icon ¢ or ¡
?
Telephone menu character bar
A
Bluetooth
®
device name of the currently
connected mobile phone
B
Displays the phone book
Symbols : to = and A are not shown until
after a mobile phone has been connected to the
multimedia system. The symbols depend on
your mobile phone and your mobile phone net-
work provider. Further information on connect-
ing a mobile phone (
Y page 92).
Symbol ; shows the current signal strength of
the mobile phone network. If all bars are filled,
you have optimum reception.
If no bars are shown, reception is either very
poor or there is none at all.
Receiver icon shows whether a call is active/
being connected ¡ or not ¢.
Calling up the telephone menu
X
Press %.
Showing the menu bar
X
Slide 6 the controller.
If the mobile phone connected supports the
MAP Bluetooth
®
profile (Message Access
Profile), the 1 menu item is available. Further
information on text messages and e-mail
(
Y page 113).
If you have an unread text message or e-mail,
the 0 mail symbol is displayed in the status
bar. The symbol disappears once you have read
the text message or e-mail. The ú symb
ol i
s
displayed as soon as the message memory on
the connected mobile phone is full. The symbol
disappears once you delete at least one mes-
sage.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile
phone
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
On the multimedia system
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
(Y page 41).
On the mobile phone
X
Switch on the mobile phone and enter the PIN
when prompted to do so (see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
This visibility is for restricted periods of time
on some mobile phones (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
Set the Bluetooth
®
device name for the
mobile phone if necessary.
The device names for all of one manufacturer's
products might be identical. To make it possible
to clearly identify your mobile phone, change
the device name (see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions). The name can be freely
selected.
92
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
Further information on allowing or suppressing
the automatic download of the phone book
(
Y page 108).
The battery of the mobile phone should always
be kept sufficiently charged in order to prevent
malfunctions.
i
Not all mobile phones available on the mar-
ket are equally suitable. You can obtain fur-
ther information about suitable mobile
phones and about the connection between
the mobile phone and the multimedia system
on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-
benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by call-
ing.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
i
Some displays (e.g. the signal strength)
depend on the supported version of the
Hands-Free Profile.
Procedure and general information
Authorizing a mobile phone (connect-
ing)
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone (
Y page 93) and then
authorize it (
Y page 94). Depending on the
mobile phone, authorization either takes place
by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by enter-
ing a passkey. The multimedia system automat-
ically makes the procedure that is relevant for
your mobile phone available. You can recognize
Secure Simple Pairing by the fact that a code is
displayed on the mobile phone and on the mul-
timedia system. You can recognize the passkey
system by the fact that you have to enter a code
on the mobile phone and on the multimedia sys-
tem. The mobile phone is connected automati-
cally after authorization. Further information
about automatically reconnecting authorized
mobile phones (
Y page 95).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone. You can
also start the search procedure and authoriza-
tion on the mobile phone (
Y page 95).
Device-specific information on authorizing and
connecting Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phones
can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or via the Internet at http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can authorize up to 15 mobile phones. After
authorization, the connection of the last two tel-
ephones used always functions automatically.
For telephony, only one mobile phone can be
connected to the multimedia system at any one
time.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a mobile
phone
The connection is terminated automatically if
you leave the receiver range of the multimedia
system or deactivate Bluetooth
®
on your mobile
phone.
If you no longer want the Bluetooth
®
connection
to be established automatically, the mobile
phone must be de-authorized (disconnected)
(
Y page 96).
Searching for a mobile phone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
93
Telephone
Z
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Search for Phones: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed that Bluetooth
®
must
be activated on the mobile phone and must be
made visible to other devices.
X
To select Start Search: press the controller.
The available mobile phones are displayed in
the device list.
The duration of the search depends on the num-
ber of Bluetooth
®
telephones within range and
their characteristics.
If a new phone is found, it appears in the device
list with the Ï symbol. You can now author-
ize (connect) the mobile phone found
(
Y page 94).
If the maximum number of authorized devices in
the device list is reached, you will be requested
to de-authorize a mobile phone (
Y page 96).
When you call up the device list again, de-
authorized devices will be removed from the list.
To update the device list, start the search again.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected.
#
Mobile phone is authorized and
connected.
Authorizing a mobile phone (connect-
ing)
Authorization via Secure Simple Pairing
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system:select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles separately. You may also save the
confirmation on the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 96).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system:select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the authori-
zation.
Authorization via passkey entry (access
code)
If the multimedia system has found your mobile
phone, you can authorize (connect) it.
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
The passkey is a one- to sixteen-digit number
combination which you can choose yourself.
Depending on the mobile phone used, you
may have to enter a number sequence of four
digits or more.
X
Multimedia system: enter the passkey using
the character bar.
X
Select ¬ once all the numbers have been
entered.
X
Mobile phone: enter the same passkey and
confirm your entry. Depending on the mobile
phone used, you may have to confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles sepa-
rately. You may also save the confirmation on
the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's
operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you can
set the mobile phone's transmission and recep-
tion volume (
Y page 96).
94
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Telephone
If the Authorization Failed message
appears, you may have entered a different pass-
key or exceeded the prescribed time limit.
Repeat the procedure.
i
If you wish to re-authorize the mobile phone
after de-authorizing it, you can choose
another passkey for it.
i
Mercedes-Benz recommends de-authoriza-
tion in the multimedia system as well as on
the mobile phone (
Y page 96). Subsequent
authorization may otherwise fail.
Establishing the connection from the
mobile phone
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Multimedia system: call up the telephone
menu.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Connect via Phone: turn and
press the controller.
A message is displayed, stating that you can
start the search on your mobile phone.
X
Mobile phone: start the search for a Blue-
tooth
®
device (see manufacturer's operating
instructions).
The multimedia system is displayed with the
name MB Bluetooth
in the mobile phone's
device list.
X
Select MB Bluetooth.
A prompt appears in the multimedia system's
display asking if the mobile phone should be
authorized.
X
Multimedia system:select Yes.
If No
is selected, the procedure is canceled.
If your mobile phone supports Secure Simple
Pairing, a code is now displayed on both devi-
ces.
The code is the same
X
Multimedia system:select Yes.
X
Mobile phone: confirm the code. Depending
on the mobile phone used, you may have to
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles separately. You may also save the
confirmation on the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The mobile phone is now authorized and con-
nected to the multimedia system. You can
now speak using the hands-free system.
To ensure an optimum language quality, you
can set the mobile phone's transmission and
reception volume (
Y page 96).
The code is different
X
Multimedia system:select No.
The process is canceled. Repeat the proce-
dure.
If your mobile phone does not support Secure
Simple Pairing, an input menu is displayed for
the passkey. The passkey is a one- to sixteen-
digit number combination which you can choose
yourself. Enter the same passkey in both the
multimedia system and on the mobile phone and
confirm. Depending on the mobile phone used,
you may have to confirm the connection to the
multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP
Bluetooth
®
profiles.
Reconnecting automatically
The multimedia system always searches for the
last connected mobile phone.
If no connection can be made to the most
recently connected mobile phone, the system
searches for the mobile phone that was con-
nected before that one.
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select the desired mobile phone: turn and
press the controller.
The selected mobile phone is connected if it is
within Bluetooth
®
range and if Bluetooth
®
is
activated.
Connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
95
Telephone
Z
Only one mobile phone can be connected at any
one time for telephony. The currently connected
mobile phone is indicated by the # dot in the
device list.
i
You can only switch to another authorized
mobile phone if you are not currently making
a call.
De-authorizing (disconnecting) a
mobile phone
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de-
authorization in the multimedia system as well
as on the mobile phone. Subsequent authoriza-
tion may otherwise fail.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Deauthorize: turn and press the
controller.
A prompt appears, asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The mobile phone is de-authorized.
Displaying connection details
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone: turn
the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Authorization status
Setting the reception and transmis-
sion volume
Once the mobile phone has been authorized,
you can optimize the transmission and recep-
tion volume settings. To find out about the best
possible settings for your mobile phone, visit
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Conn. Device: turn and press the
controller.
The device list appears.
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Reception Volume or Transmis‐
sion Volume: turn and press the controller.
X
To select a volume setting: turn the controller.
X
To accept changes: press the controller.
i
Incorrect settings may have an impact on
the quality of calls.
96
Setting the reception and transmission volume
Telephone
Using the telephone
Accepting a call
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The call is accepted.
Additional functions available during a call
(
Y page 98).
Adjusting the call volume (
Y page 96).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
i
If the phone number of the caller is trans-
ferred, it appears in the display. If the phone
number is saved in the phone book, the con-
tact's name and picture are also displayed. If
the phone number is not transferred,
Unknown
is shown in the display.
Rejecting a call
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Making a call
Using the telephone menu
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select the sequence of numbers: turn and
press the controller for each number.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using the number keypad
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
Enter the number sequence using the number
keypad.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The call is made.
Redial
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select w in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
The list of outgoing calls is displayed. The
most recently dialed number is at the top.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
For redialing using the multifunction steering
wheel (see the vehicle Operator's Manual).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using call lists
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
X
Search for and call a contact (Y page 101).
Using the telephone
97
Telephone
Z
Selecting and placing a call using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel (see vehicle Operator's Man-
ual)
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Using speed dial
Option 1
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To highlight a number from the character bar:
turn the controller.
X
Press the controller for longer than two sec-
onds.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Option 2
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Speed Dial Preset List: turn
and press the controller.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To select an entry and make a call: turn and
press the controller.
The telephone menu displays the selected
entry. The number is dialed.
Further information on setting up speed dial
(
Y page 112).
Further information about ending a call
(
Y page 100).
Functions available during a call
Overview
:
Adds a call (Y page 98)
;
Person you are calling
=
Symbol for active telephone connection
?
Ends a call
A
Switches the microphone on/off
(
Y page 99)
B
Sends DTMF tones (not possible with all
mobile phones) (
Y page 99)
Other functions:
R
Accepting a waiting call (Y page 100)
R
Call waiting (Y page 99)
R
Conducting a conference call (Y page 99)
Availability depends on the network (only pos-
sible on GSM networks) and the Bluetooth
®
mobile phone.
Adding a call
:
Adds a call
If the mobile phone network provider and the
mobile phone support the function, you can
make another call during an existing call. The
previously active call is held.
X
To select °
2
: turn and press the controller.
X
To make a call, e.g.:
98
Using the telephone
Telephone
R
Using the telephone menu (Y page 97)
R
Using redial (Y page 97)
R
Using the call lists (Y page 97)
R
Using the phone book (Y page 97)
R
Using speed dial (Y page 98)
Switching the microphone on or off
This function is available in the telephone menu
during an active phone call.
Switching off the microphone:
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Microphone Off: turn and press
the controller.
If the microphone is switched off, the Q
symbol and the The microphone is off.
message are displayed.
Switching on the microphone:
X
Select Microphone On.
The Q symbol disappears. The The micro‐
phone is on. message is shown.
Sending DTMF tones
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Answering machines or other devices can be
controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote query
functions.
X
If you would like to listen to the messages on
your answering machine, for example, dial the
corresponding number.
Transmitting individual characters
X
Once a connection has been established to
the answer phone, select the desired charac-
ters in the telephone menu: turn and press the
controller each time.
or
X
Press the corresponding key on the number
keypad.
Every character selected will be transmitted
immediately.
Calls with several participants
Switching between calls (call waiting)
If you make another call, you can switch
between the two calls (call waiting). This func-
tion depends on your mobile phone network
provider and the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions).
The calls are marked 1 and 2. The active call is
highlighted.
Switching between the calls
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
or
X
To select °
1
or °
2
: turn and press the con-
troller.
The selected call is active. The other call is on
hold.
Ending the active call
X
To select = in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The other call is still on hold.
X
To activate the call on hold: select w
Resume.
The call on hold is activated. If you select
=
Hang Up, the call on hold is also ended.
i
On some mobile phones, the call on hold is
activated as soon as the active call is ended.
Conference call
This function depends on your mobile phone
network provider and the mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). You can
interconnect active and held calls. This permits
Using the telephone
99
Telephone
Z
several parties to hear one another and speak
with one another.
X
Add a call (Y page 98).
or
X
Answer an incoming call (Y page 100).
X
To select Conference in the telephone menu:
turn and press the controller.
The new participant is included in the confer-
ence call. Conference Call
is displayed in
the telephone menu.
Incoming call during an existing call
(call waiting)
The call waiting function depends on your
mobile phone network provider and your mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
behavior when answering a call may vary (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Call waiting: if you receive a call while already
in a call, a message is shown. You also hear a
tone. You can decide whether to accept or reject
the call.
Accepting
X
To select w Accept: press the controller.
or
X
Press 6 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The incoming call is active. Depending on the
mobile phone used, the call which was previ-
ously active is put on hold or ended (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). If the
call is on hold, you can switch back and forth
between the two calls (call waiting)
(
Y page 99).
i
Depending on the mobile phone, you may
also be able to accept the incoming call (call
waiting) on your mobile phone. This function
and behavior depends on your mobile phone
network provider and the mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Rejecting
X
To select = Reject: turn and press the
controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The behavior after the call is rejected depends
on your mobile phone and mobile phone net-
work provider.
Option 1: The originally active call is ended
and the incoming call is accepted.
Option 2: Both calls are ended.
Ending an active call
X
To select = in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
or
X
Press ~ on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The active call is ended.
Mobile phone voice recognition
You can start or end voice recognition on your
mobile phone with this function. Further infor-
mation on the voice recognition service; see the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
Starting the mobile phone voice recognition
X
Connect the mobile phone to the multimedia
system (
Y page 92).
X
Press and hold the ó button on the multi-
function steering wheel for more than one
second.
You can now use the mobile phone voice rec-
ognition.
Ending the mobile phone voice recognition
X
Press 8 on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The mobile phone voice recognition is stop-
ped.
100
Mobile phone voice recognition
Telephone
Phone book
Introduction
The phone book displays the contacts from the
address book which have a phone number.
The phone book of the mobile phone is auto-
matically displayed in the multimedia system
after the connection is established (default set-
ting). You can deactivate automatic calling up
(
Y page 108).
In the telephone book, you can:
R
Create new contacts (Y page 102)
R
Add information to contacts (Y page 103)
R
Search for contacts (Y page 101)
R
Store contacts (Y page 104)
R
Delete contacts (Y page 104)
Further information on importing contacts
(
Y page 109).
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be permanently saved in the multime-
dia system. These contacts will remain available
even when you connect the multimedia system
to a different mobile phone. You can view these
contacts even without a mobile phone.
Calling up the phone book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To select Name in the telephone menu: turn
and press the controller.
If the phone book contains contacts, they will
be displayed in alphabetical order. The char-
acter bar at the bottom of the display is active.
You can now search for a contact
(
Y page 101).
Further information on the symbols shown
(
Y page 101).
i
You can also call up the phone book with the
multifunction steering wheel; see the Vehi-
cles Operator's Manual.
Symbol overview
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Æ
Contact that has been entered, edi-
ted or saved in the multimedia sys-
tem
\
Contact with voice tag
These contacts have also been
assigned a voice tag. For more infor-
mation, see the separate operating
instructions.
Ã
Contact that was called up from a
mobile phone
¯
Contact imported from the SD mem-
ory card or USB device
®
Contact imported via the Bluetooth
®
interface
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book. If there
are similar contacts, the next different char-
acter is shown. For example, with contacts
such as Jana
and John, the beginnings of the
Phone book
101
Telephone
Z
names are identical. The next different char-
acter A
and O are offered for selection.
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X
To end the search: select ¬.
The contacts in the phone book are displayed.
X
To highlight a contact: turn the controller.
X
To call the contact: press the controller.
The G symbol indicates that a contact contains
more than one phone number.
X
To select a contact with the G symbol: turn
the controller and press to confirm.
The phone numbers are displayed. The G
symbol changes to I.
X
To call a telephone number: turn and press
the controller.
Back to the character bar
X
Press the % button repeatedly until the
character bar is displayed.
Further information about character entry
(
Y page 29).
Using the number keypad
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
For example, to enter the letter C: press the
l number key briefly three times in suc-
cession.
The character appears the first time the key is
pressed and shows all the available charac-
ters. It switches to the next character each
time the key is pressed.
Using the touchpad
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Press the touchpad.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the phone book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
phone book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Using the multifunction steering wheel
X
Dial a number from the phone book; see the
vehicle Operator's Manual.
Displaying the details of a contact
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Search for and highlight a contact
(
Y page 101).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
Closing the detailed display
X
To select %: slide 8 the controller.
Adding a new contact
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
In the phone book, slide 5 the controller
repeatedly until the character bar disappears.
102
Phone book
Telephone
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select New Entry: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as preferred, it is
shown at the top of the list.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu with data fields is displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam-
ple.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The contact is created in the phone book and
in the address book.
Adding information to a contact
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Search for and highlight a contact in the
phone book (
Y page 101).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Add Phone No.: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a category for the number, e.g.
Home
: turn the controller and press to confirm.
X
To select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
If you have marked a number as preferred, it is
shown at the top of the list.
X
To select Continue: turn and press the con-
troller.
An input line appears.
X
Enter the telephone number.
X
Select ¬.
If five numbers are already stored for the con-
tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num-
bers:
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
X
To select the phone number to be overwritten
from the list: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The entry field for the new phone number is
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam-
ple.
If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone
numbers:
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Automatically importing contacts
from the mobile phone
Depending on the mobile phone used, you can
set whether the contacts should be called up
automatically after the mobile phone is connec-
ted to the multimedia system.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Automatically Import Con‐
tacts from Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can allow O or deactivate ª the auto-
matic download. If the function is deactiva-
ted, contacts which have already been called
up will continue to be displayed.
If the function is deactivated, the contacts can
be called up manually:
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Import Contacts: turn and press
the controller.
The contacts are called up.
Phone book
103
Telephone
Z
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 101).
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Search for and highlight a contact from the
mobile phone d (
Y page 101).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved. The contact
is identified by the ¥ symbol in the phone
book.
i
Saved contacts are also displayed in the
address book.
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic calling-up
of phone contacts is activated, the multime-
dia system displays the copy ¥ with the
changed data.
Deleting a name
You can delete contacts that have been added,
supplemented, saved or imported in the multi-
media system.
If there are one or several phone numbers saved
under the contact, the contact is deleted from
the phone book and the address book.
If there are additional entries under the contact,
such as a navigable destination, only the phone
numbers are deleted. The contact is retained in
the address book with the remaining entries.
X
Call up the phone book (Y page 101).
X
Search for and highlight a contact in the
phone book (
Y page 101).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
A prompt appears asking whether the contact
should be deleted.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The phone number is deleted.
Closing the phone book
X
To select & from the character bar: turn the
controller and press to confirm.
or
X
Press the % button.
Address book
Introduction
Always pay attention to traffic conditions.
Familiarize yourself with the address book func-
tions before beginning your journey.
You can use the multimedia system when the
road and traffic conditions permit. You could
otherwise become involved in an accident in
which you or others could be injured.
The address book displays all the contacts from
the various sources (mobile phone, memory
card, USB device, the phone book of the multi-
media system, navigation).
You can use the contacts to make telephone
calls, navigate and to write messages.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system and automatic calling up is activated
(
Y page 108), the mobile phone's contacts are
displayed in the address book. If you disconnect
the mobile phone from the multimedia system,
these contacts are no longer displayed in the
address book.
When you import, save, edit or add contacts,
they will be saved in the multimedia system.
These contacts will remain available even when
you connect the multimedia system to a differ-
ent mobile phone. You can view these contacts
even without a mobile phone.
i
The address book can store a total of 5000
contacts.
R
2000 entries are reserved for permanently
saved contacts.
R
3000 entries are reserved for contacts that
you can load from the mobile phone.
i
Before selling your vehicle, delete the con-
tacts saved in the multimedia system using
the reset function (
Y page 43).
104
Address book
Telephone
Calling up the address book
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Address Book: turn and press the
controller.
X
To browse in the address book: turn the con-
troller.
An address book entry can also include a pic-
ture. This is shown to the left of the address
data. Address book entries with pictures can
only be created by importing vCards (vcf
files). Further information on importing
vCards (
Y page 109). The quality of the pic-
ture depends on the picture's resolution.
Searching for a contact
Using the character bar
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select characters: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the address book. If
there are similar contacts, the next different
character is shown. For example, with con-
tacts such as Jana
and John, the beginnings
of the names are identical. The next different
character A
and O are offered for selection.
X
Select the characters of the contact you are
searching for one by one, pressing and con-
firming with the controller each time.
X
To end the search: select b.
The contacts in the address book are dis-
played.
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To return to the character bar: press the
% button repeatedly until the character
bar is displayed.
Further information about character entry
(
Y page 29).
Using the number keypad
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
For example, to enter the letter C: press the
l number key briefly three times in suc-
cession.
The character appears the first time the key is
pressed and shows all the available charac-
ters. It switches to the next character each
time the key is pressed.
Using the touchpad
You determine the first letter of the contact you
are looking for with the first character you enter.
X
Draw the letter on the touchpad surface.
The first contact with the selected first char-
acter is highlighted in the address book.
Further information on handwriting recogni-
tion on the touchpad (
Y page 24).
X
Draw additional letters on the touchpad sur-
face one after another.
X
To complete the search and return to the
address book: press the touchpad.
X
To select and call the contact: glide up or
down and press.
Adding a new contact
You can enter address data directly into the
address book. If you store telephone numbers in
the phone book of the multimedia system, these
are also saved in the address book. If you store
a navigation destination, the multimedia system
creates an address book entry that includes the
complete navigable address data.
Address book
105
Telephone
Z
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
The surname and first name input lines are
displayed.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam-
ple.
X
To save the surname and first name: select
b.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add a desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam-
ple.
X
To finish and save an entry: select b.
Displaying contact details
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
The entries can be categorized as follows:
\
Business details
6
Home details
i An address book entry can contain the fol-
lowing information:
R
name
R
first name
R
company
R
up to five telephone numbers
R
two email addresses
R
Internet address
R
two addresses
R
geo-coordinates
Adding information to a contact
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To add the desired entry (e.g. Add E-Mail
Address): turn and press the controller.
Depending on the type of entry, the corre-
sponding input menu appears.
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad (
Y page 29), for example.
X
To finish and save an entry: select b.
Starting route guidance to an address
or geo-coordinates
If an address with a ZIP code is saved, the
address can be used for route guidance. If the
ZIP code cannot be assigned to an exact
address, you can adjust the destination subse-
quently using the controller.
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select the address or geo-coordinates:
turn and press the controller.
The navigation menu is displayed.
X
To select Start Route Guidance: slide 6
and press the controller.
The route to the destination address is calcu-
lated and route guidance starts.
106
Address book
Telephone
Making a call
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select a telephone number: turn and press
the controller.
The number is dialed. Further information
about the functions during a call (
Y page 98).
Sending text messages
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the telephone number: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Send Text Message: turn and
press the controller.
The entry fields for a text message are dis-
played.
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
Sending an e-mail
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select an e-mail address: turn and press
the controller.
The entry fields for an e-mail are displayed
(
Y page 117).
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
Displaying sub-entry information
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The display is shown in full.
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Editing a contact
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The entry field for the selected entry is dis-
played.
Further information about character entry
(
Y page 29).
Changing the category of an entry
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Category: turn and press
the controller.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
X
Select Save.
Storing the phone number as a speed
dial number
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Select an entry: turn and press the controller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Speed Dial: turn and press the
controller.
Address book
107
Telephone
Z
X
To select Assign Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select a memory position for the speed
dial: turn and press the controller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Voice tags
Introduction
You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control
System (see the separate operating instruc-
tions). Once you have assigned a voice tag to an
address book entry, you can call up this entry
with a voice command and dial a phone number,
for example. You can add one voice tag per
address book entry.
Adding a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Search for an address book entry with or with-
out a voice tag ¦ (
Y page 105).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Add: turn and press the controller.
Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.
The Voice Control System guides you through
the dialogs.
Deleting a voice tag
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 105).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The voice tag is deleted.
Listening to a voice tag
X
Search for an address book entry with a voice
tag (
Y page 105).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Voice Tag: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Listen: turn and press the control-
ler.
You hear the voice tag.
Changing the display and sorting cri-
teria for contacts
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Display and Sorting: turn and
press the controller.
You have the following options:
R
Last Name, First Name (default setting)
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played with a comma.
R
Last Name First Name
The contacts are sorted by surname and dis-
played without a comma.
R
First Name Last Name
The contacts are sorted by first name and dis-
played without a comma.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
The contacts are sorted and displayed
according to the selection.
Automatically importing contacts
from the phone
Depending on the mobile phone used, you can
set whether the contacts should be called up
automatically after the mobile phone is connec-
ted to the multimedia system.
X
Connect a mobile phone (Y page 92).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
108
Address book
Telephone
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Automatically Import Con‐
tacts from Phone: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can allow O or suppress ª the auto-
matic download. If the function is deactiva-
ted, contacts which have already been called
up will continue to be displayed.
Saving a contact
Saved contacts are indicated in the phone book
by different symbols (
Y page 101).
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details for the contact are displayed.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
The contact has now been saved.
i
If the saved address book entry contains a
phone number, the entry is also displayed in
the phone book.
Saving or editing the contact data in the mul-
timedia system does not change the contacts
on the mobile phone. If automatic download-
ing of phone contacts is activated, the multi-
media system displays the copy ¥ with the
changed data. To add additional data, such as
additional phone numbers or e-mail
addresses, select this contact. In this way,
you avoid creating additional copies of the
mobile phone entry.
Deleting a name
X
Call up the address book (Y page 105).
X
Search for a contact (Y page 105).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contact is deleted.
Closing the address book
X
Press the % button.
Importing contacts
Information and requirements
Contacts can be imported as vCards (vcf files). A
vCard is an electronic business card. A memory
card, USB device or a Bluetooth
®
connection
can be used for importing.
i
Up to 2000 entries can be imported into the
address book. A message notifies you when
the maximum number is reached. In order to
be able to then import new contacts, you have
to delete existing contacts (
Y page 109).
Source Requirements
Memory card The SD card is inserted. It
contains importable contact
details.
USB device The USB device is inserted
into the USB port. It contains
importable contact details.
Bluetooth
®
connection
If the sending of vCards is
supported via Bluetooth
®
,
vCards can be received on
mobile phones or netbooks,
for example.
Bluetooth
®
must be activa-
ted in the multimedia system
and on the respective device;
see the manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
Importing from the memory card or
USB device
Contacts imported from the memory card or
from a USB device are identified by the ¯
symbol.
The following conditions must be fulfilled in
order to import vCards:
R
vCards (vcf files) may be located in the main
directory or in folders. The multimedia system
allows for a targeted selection of the corre-
sponding directories.
R
vCards must have the file extension ".vcf".
i
The multimedia system supports vCards in
versions 2.1 and 3.0.
Importing contacts
109
Telephone
Z
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Memory Card , USB 1 or USB
2: turn and press the controller.
X
Select All Folders.
or
X
Select the desired folder or individual vCard.
X
Select Continue.
The selected contacts are imported.
Receiving vCards via Bluetooth
®
Multimedia system
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Download Contacts: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select From Bluetooth Device: turn and
press the controller.
If the multimedia system is connected to a
mobile phone, all connections are termina-
ted. vCards can now be received by a device
(PC, mobile phone) via Bluetooth
®
.
External device
X
Start the data transfer; see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
The number of vCards received is displayed in
the multimedia system.
Multimedia system
X
To end reception: press the controller or the
% button.
If a mobile phone was connected, the con-
nection to the mobile phone is established
again.
vCards received via Bluetooth
®
are identified by
the ® symbol in the phone book.
i
If you switch to another main function, e.g.
navigation, while receiving vCards, the recep-
tion of vCards will be terminated.
Deleting imported contacts
X
To switch to the menu bar in the telephone
menu or the address book: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete Contacts: turn and press
the controller.
X
Select one of the following options:
R
Internal Contacts
R
Downloaded from Phone
R
Imported from Storage Device
R
Imported from BT Devices
Turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The contacts are deleted.
i
If automatic calling up of the contacts is
deactivated (
Y page 108), the Downloaded
from Phone option is available.
110
Importing contacts
Telephone
Call lists
Introduction
If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue-
tooth
®
profile, the call lists from the mobile
phone are displayed in the multimedia system.
If the mobile phone call lists cannot be dis-
played, the multimedia system generates its
own call lists. These are not the same as the call
lists in your mobile phone.
The Call
Lists option is not available unless a
mobile phone is connected to the multimedia
system.
If the contact for an incoming call is not saved in
the address book, you can use the call list to
save the telephone number. You can save this
telephone number as a new contact in the
address book or add it to an existing contact
(
Y page 111).
i
If you connect a different mobile phone to
the multimedia system, the call lists from the
new mobile phone are displayed.
Opening the call list and selecting an
entry
:
Date and time (if available)
;
Telephone number of the highlighted entry
and symbols (if assigned)
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight an entry: turn the controller.
X
To make a call: press the controller.
Closing the call list
X
To select &: slide 8 and press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the % button.
The list is closed.
Displaying details from a list entry
Abbreviated list entries can also be shown in full.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired entry: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The details are displayed.
X
To go back to the list: slide 8 the controller
repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
Saving telephone numbers
Adding new entries to the address book
Call lists
111
Telephone
Z
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select New Entry.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
The selected category is marked with #.
If you have marked a number as Preferred
, it
is shown at the top of the list.
X
Select Continue.
The entry field for the name of the new con-
tact is displayed. The entry field for the tele-
phone number is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad, for exam-
ple.
X
To finish and save an entry: select ¬.
The new contact has been created.
Adding information to an address book
entry
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select Calls Received or Calls Dialed:
turn and press the controller.
The relevant list is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired telephone number:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Save: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Contact.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The address book is displayed.
X
Search for the desired contact and highlight
(
Y page 105).
X
To save a telephone number: press the con-
troller.
A maximum of five telephone numbers can be
saved for one contact.
If five numbers are already stored for the con-
tact you are searching for, a prompt will appear
asking whether you wish to overwrite one of the
existing numbers.
If you wish to overwrite one of the phone num-
bers:
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
A list of the existing five phone numbers is
displayed.
X
To select the phone number to be overwritten
from the list: turn the controller and press to
confirm.
The entry is overwritten with the new tele-
phone number.
If you do not wish to overwrite any of the phone
numbers:
X
To select No: turn and press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Speed dial lists
Setting up
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List.
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight a memory position for the speed
dial: turn the controller.
If you highlight an entry that already exists in
the speed dial list, this is overwritten with the
new entry.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
Select Assign Speed Dial Preset.
The phone book is displayed.
112
Speed dial lists
Telephone
X
Search for a contact (Y page 101).
X
To select a contact: turn and press the con-
troller.
The phone number has been saved as a speed
dial.
Deleting
Deleting a speed dial preset
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List .
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To highlight the memory position you want to
delete: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Speed Dial Preset: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The speed dial preset has been deleted.
Deleting all speed dial presets
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To call up the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Call Lists : turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Speed Dial Preset List .
The speed dial list is displayed.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete All Speed Dial Pre‐
sets: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
All speed dials are deleted.
Messages (text messages and e-
mails)
General notes
New messages are identified by the / sym-
bol in the display of the multimedia system and
an audible signal. Once you have read all the
messages, the symbol is no longer displayed.
The multimedia system displays the 100 newest
text messages and e-mails.
The ú symbol is displayed when the mobile
phone's message memory is full. The symbol is
no longer displayed if you delete messages.
Function restrictions
Text messages cannot be written while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Requirements
To use the message functions, the connected
mobile phone must support the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile. When connecting the mobile phone, you
may have to accept the prompt for the MAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
With some mobile phones, some settings still
have to be made after connecting to the multi-
media system (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions). The messages are then dis-
played the next time you connect to the multi-
media system.
An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile
phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac-
turer’s operating instructions).
To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys-
tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con-
figured (
Y page 114).
Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile:
R
only show new text messages
R
do not support the deleting or editing of text
messages
R
do not support the drafts folder for text mes-
sages
R
do not support the sending of text messages
R
do not support the e-mail function
R
do not send messages when in a locked sta-
tus
Not all mobile phones available on the market
are equally suitable. Further information about
settings and supported functions of Bluetooth
®
-
capable mobile phones can be found on the
Internet at
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect.
You can also obtain more information by calling.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
113
Telephone
Z
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center on
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Settings
Calling up the settings menu for mes-
sages
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
The text message settings and the available e-
mail accounts of the connected mobile phone
will be displayed.
Configuring the text messages dis-
played
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 114).
X
To highlight Text Message: turn the control-
ler.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
All the messages are displayed.
R
New Messages
Only the messages that are new on the
mobile phone are displayed.
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can display the 100 newest text
messages from the mobile phone using the
Download
option in the message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Configuring the e-mails displayed
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 114).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Automatic Download: turn and
press the controller.
A menu with the following options is shown:
R
All Messages
All the messages are displayed.
R
New Messages
Only the messages that are new on the
mobile phone are displayed.
R
Off
The messages are not displayed automati-
cally. You can display the 100 newest e-
mails from the mobile phone using the
Download
option in the message menu.
X
To select the required option: turn and press
the controller.
Configuring an e-mail account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 114).
X
To select an e-mail account: turn and press
the controller.
The e-mail account is now configured. E-mails
can now be received and sent in the multi-
media system.
Deactivating the e-mail function
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 114).
X
To select E-Mail Off: turn and press the
controller.
E-mail reception is deactivated.
Changing the displayed name of the e-
mail account
X
Call up the settings menu for messages
(
Y page 114).
X
To highlight an e-mail account: turn the con-
troller.
114
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Own E-Mail Address: turn and
press the controller.
The input menu for entering your own e-mail
address is displayed.
Downloading messages manually
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Download: turn and press the con-
troller.
Downloading text messages and e-mails
from the phone
X
Select From the Phone.
The messages are downloaded. If you have
selected Automatic Download
in the e-mail
settings, manual downloading is not possible.
Updating from the e-mail server by the
mobile phone
X
Select From the E-Mail Server.
The e-mails in the mobile phone are updated.
This function is not supported by all mobile
phones.
Reading messages
In the message menu
The message menu contains all the unread text
messages and e-mails. If the corresponding
folder is called up, the messages are displayed
sorted by text messages and e-mails.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed with the
unread messages.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message text is displayed.
X
To close the message text: press the %
button.
If you want to read messages that have already
been read again, you have to call up the corre-
sponding message folder (
Y page 115).
In the message folder
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select the desired folder in Text Message
or E-Mail category: turn and press the con-
troller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
The message is displayed.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
115
Telephone
Z
X
To scroll through the message or select phone
numbers in the text: turn the controller.
The display scrolls up or down line by line, or
skips to the next or previous telephone num-
ber and automatically highlights it.
X
To close the message text: press the %
button.
The following sub-folders can be selected
for text messages and e-mails:
R
Inbox
This folder contains all the incoming mes-
sages.
R
Outbox
This folder contains all the outgoing mes-
sages.
R
Drafts
This folder contains all the messages that you
have saved as a draft.
i
Folders cannot be selected if they are
empty.
Depending on the mobile phone used, the sub-
folder function may be available.
Read-aloud function for messages
X
To start the read-aloud function: press the
controller when the message is displayed.
X
To select Read Aloud: turn and press the
controller.
The multimedia system reads the message
aloud.
X
To cancel the read-aloud function: press the
8 button.
or
X
Press the controller, select Cancel Read-
Aloud Function and press the controller
again.
You can set the language (
Y page 41) and the
speed (
Y page 37) of the read-aloud function.
Displaying details and phone numbers
The multimedia system can also show a short-
ened sender display in full.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Folder: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The selected folder is displayed.
X
To highlight the desired message: turn the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The detailed view appears.
X
To close the detailed display: slide 8 the
controller.
Writing text messages
Writing a new text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Text Message: turn and press the
controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The To:
input line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad (
Y page 29).
or
116
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
X
To enter a phone number from the phone
book: select the Æ symbol.
The contacts from the address book which
have a phone number are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 101).
The number is copied to the recipient line.
Entering text and sending text messages
X
To select an input line for text: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 118).
X
To send the text message: select OK.
Answering a text message
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 115).
X
Press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The text message input menu is displayed.
The addressee's details are automatically fil-
led in using the details in the original mes-
sage.
Writing e-mails
Writing a new e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select E-Mail: turn and press the control-
ler.
The e-mail input menu appears. The To:
input
line is selected.
Entering a recipient
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad (
Y page 29).
or
X
To insert an e-mail address from the address
book: select the Æ symbol.
The contacts from the address book which
have an e-mail address are displayed.
X
Search for and select an entry (Y page 101).
The e-mail address is copied to the addressee
line.
Entering the subject
X
To select the Subject: input line: select 5 in
the character bar.
X
Enter characters.
Entering text and sending e-mails
X
To select an input line for text: select 5 in the
character bar.
X
Enter characters.
The multimedia system contains templates
which you can use to compile your messages
(
Y page 118).
X
To send the e-mail: select OK.
Answering an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 115).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Reply: turn and press the controller.
The e-mail input menu appears. The addres-
see's details are automatically filled in using
the details in the original message.
When replying to an e-mail, you can also select
Reply to All
instead of Reply. In this case,
the reply is sent not just to the sender but to all
those who received the original message.
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
117
Telephone
Z
Forwarding an e-mail
Observe the requirements for the message func-
tion (
Y page 113).
X
Display the message (Y page 115).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Forward: turn and press the con-
troller.
The input menu appears. The subject line is
automatically filled in with the same details as
those in the original message.
Text templates
Using text templates
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 116) or e-mail (Y page 117).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To select and insert a text template: turn and
press the controller.
The text template is inserted into the text
message or e-mail.
Editing text templates
:
Displays text templates
X
Select the input line for a text message
(
Y page 116) or e-mail (Y page 117).
X
To select text templates : in the character
bar: turn and press the controller.
The text templates are displayed.
X
To highlight the text template to be edited:
turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Edit: turn and press the controller.
The text template is displayed in an input line.
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad (
Y page 29).
X
To adopt changes to the text template, select
¬: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Yes.
The text template has been changed.
Calling a text message sender
X
Display the message (Y page 115).
X
To call up a menu: press the controller.
X
To select Call Sender: turn and press the
controller.
The call is made.
Using a phone number in the text
Numbers in text messages that are highlighted
can be used.
X
To highlight and select a usable phone num-
ber while the message is displayed: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Use: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Call: turn and press the controller.
The call is made.
i
It is possible that a highlighted numerical
sequence may not contain a telephone num-
ber.
Storing sender as a new contact
Storing the sender of a text message
X
To call up the menu when a text message is
displayed: press the controller.
X
To select Save Number: turn and press the
controller.
118
Messages (text messages and e-mails)
Telephone
X
Select New Entry.
or
X
Select Add to Contact.
X
Select a number category, e.g. Home.
X
Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile
Phone.
X
Select Continue.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the telephone
number is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller
(
Y page 29) or the number keypad.
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Saving the sender of an e-mail
X
To call up the menu when an e-mail is dis-
played: press the controller.
X
To select Save Sender's E-Mail Address:
turn and press the controller.
The input line for the name of the new contact
is displayed. The input line for the e-mail
address is filled in automatically.
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad (
Y page 29).
X
To finish the entry: select OK.
The new contact has been created.
Deleting messages
X
Call up the message folder (Y page 115).
X
To select the message: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The message is deleted from the multimedia
system and the mobile phone.
i
This delete function is not supported by all
mobile phones. The Delete failed.
mes-
sage then appears.
Dictation function
Requirements
To use the dictation function, the connected
mobile phone must support the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile. When connecting the mobile phone, you
may have to accept the prompt for the MAP
Bluetooth
®
profile.
With some mobile phones, some settings still
have to be made after connecting to the multi-
media system (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions).
An e-mail account must be set up on the mobile
phone for the e-mail function (see the manufac-
turer’s operating instructions).
To read and write e-mails in the multimedia sys-
tem, the e-mail account first needs to be con-
figured (
Y page 114).
Some mobile phones with the MAP Bluetooth
®
profile:
R
do not support the deleting or editing of text
messages
R
do not support the drafts folder for text mes-
sages
R
do not support the sending of text messages
R
do not support the e-mail function
R
do not send messages when in a locked sta-
tus
Calling up text messages or e-mails in
the message menu
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select 1: turn and press the controller.
The message menu is displayed.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select New: turn and press the controller.
X
To select Text Message or E-Mail: turn and
press the controller.
The input menu for the message is displayed.
Dictation function
119
Telephone
Z
Calling up and using the dictation
function
X
Select the o microphone.
The app for the dictation function is loaded.
If there was no prior Internet connection, a
connection is now established.
X
To start the dictation function: press the
controller.
X
Say your message.
The dictation ends automatically after you
have finished speaking.
After the spoken message has been pro-
cessed, it is shown as text on the display.
X
To select words: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
In the correction menu, you can:
R
adjust capitalization of words (if supported
by the character set)
R
add words
R
delete words
R
replace the dictated message with a new
one
X
To exit the menu: select Done.
Send message
The dictated text is displayed in the message
input window.
X
Enter the telephone number or e-mail address
into the addressee line.
X
To send the message: select OK.
Apple CarPlay™
Introduction
iPhone
®
functions can be used via the multime-
dia system using Apple CarPlay™. Apple Car-
Play™ can be operated using the controller or
Siri
®
voice-operated control system. Whether
selected buttons are supported in the vehicle
depends on the iOS version of the mobile phone
and the apps available. You will find an overview
of the multimedia system's control panel and
available buttons here (
Y page 18).
To activate voice-operated control, press and
hold the ó button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel (
Y page 100). Apple CarPlay™ is only
available for Apple
®
mobile phones (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions). The
availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary by coun-
try and depending on vehicle equipment.
During Apple CarPlay™ use, various multimedia
system functions, such as navigation, are not
available.
The provider is responsible for its application
and related services and content.
Requirements
R
Apple CarPlay™ is available from the iPhone
®
5. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
the latest operating system on the iPhone
®
.
R
You require a connector cable for the
iPhone
®
.
R
The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay™
is only possible when the Apple CarPlay™-
capable mobile phone is connected to the
Internet.
Connecting the iPhone
®
with the mul-
timedia system
In order to be able to use Apple CarPlay™, a
connection must be established between the
iPhone
®
and the multimedia system.
X
Connect the iPhone
®
via a connection cable
to the USB port ç.
The first time you connect an Apple CarPlay™-
capable mobile phone to the multimedia sys-
tem or switch between Apple CarPlay™-capa-
ble mobile phones, a prompt appears asking
whether you want future activation to be auto-
matic or manual.
Activating Apple CarPlay™
Automatic activation
X
To select Auto: press the controller.
Apple CarPlay™ will start automatically each
time a connection has been established
between the iPhone
®
and the multimedia sys-
tem.
Manual activation
120
Apple CarPlay™
Telephone
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Tel/®: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay™ starts.
i
Depending on the operating status, not all of
the steps may be necessary. A message to
start Apple CarPlay™ appears on the display.
Confirm this.
Changing the activation type
When the mobile phone is disconnected from
the multimedia system, the activation mode can
be changed.
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Tel/®: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
Select Apple CarPlay.
X
To show the menu bar: slide 6 the control-
ler.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Deactivate ª or activate O Start Apple
CarPlay Automatically.
Ending Apple CarPlay™ mode
X
Remove the connection cable from the USB
port ç.
The No Apple CarPlay Device Connec‐
ted Please ensure that your device
is connected to the correct USB port.
message appears.
Transmitted vehicle data
When using Apple CarPlay™, specific vehicle
data are transmitted to the mobile phone. This
makes it possible to use selected mobile phone
services efficiently. The mobile phone does not
have active access to vehicle data.
The following system information is transmitted:
R
Vehicle model
R
Vehicle model year
R
Multimedia system software version
These data are transmitted in order to optimize
communication between the vehicle and mobile
phone.
A random vehicle code is generated for this pur-
pose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to
the mobile phone.
This code is not related to the vehicle identifi-
cation number (VIN) and is deleted if the multi-
media system is reset (
Y page 43).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R
Gear position engaged
R
Difference between parked, stationary,
coasting and driving
R
Instrument cluster day/night mode
These data are transmitted in order to adapt the
content displayed to the driving situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R
GPS coordinates
R
Speed
R
Compass direction
R
Acceleration direction
R
Gyroscopic effects
These data are transmitted only when naviga-
tion is active in order to improve navigation (e.g.
when driving through a tunnel).
If you do not wish to have your vehicle data
transmitted, you can deactivate automatic start-
ing of Apple CarPlay™ (
Y page 121) and briefly
terminate the mobile phone's USB connection
to the vehicle.
Android Auto™
Introduction
Functions on mobile phones with the Android™
operating system can be used with Android
Auto™:
R
Android Auto™-capable apps from the mobile
phone are shown in the multimedia system.
R
Audio content from the mobile phone is
played back in the multimedia system.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be con-
nected to the multimedia system via Android
Auto™.
Android Auto™
121
Telephone
Z
Various multimedia system functions such as
the navigation system are not available while
using Android Auto™.
The availability of Android Auto™ and Android
Auto™ apps may vary from country to country
and depending on the equipment in the vehicle.
The provider is responsible for its application
and related services and content.
Connecting a mobile phone via
Android Auto™
Requirements:
R
For safety reasons, the first time Android
Auto™ is activated on the multimedia system,
the vehicle must be stationary.
R
The mobile phone supports Android Auto™
from Android™ 5.0.
R
The Android Auto™ app is installed on the
mobile phone.
R
In order to use the telephone functions, a
mobile phone needs to be connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth
®
.
R
The full range of functions for Android Auto™
is only possible with an Internet connection.
R
The mobile phone is connected to the USB
port ç on the multimedia system via a USB
cable.
The multimedia system automatically estab-
lishes a connection to the mobile phone via
Bluetooth
®
. If this is unsuccessful, an error mes-
sage will appear. In this case, you should con-
nect the mobile phone manually via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92).
Starting Android Auto™
Multimedia system
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Tel/®: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Android Auto: turn and press the
controller.
You see a message informing you that no
Android Auto™ device is connected.
Mobile phone
X
Connect the mobile phone to the USB port
ç in the center console.
When activated manually a message appears
on the display of the multimedia system when
Android Auto™ is started.
X
To confirm the message: press the controller.
The Android Auto™ app is shown in the mul-
timedia system display.
Setting up automatic connection
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Tel/®: turn and press the control-
ler.
X
To select Android Auto: turn and press the
controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Start Android Auto Automati‐
cally: turn and press the controller.
X
Allow automatic connection O.
Android Auto™ starts automatically as soon
as the mobile phone is connected to the USB
port ç of the multimedia system.
Calling up the sound settings for
Android Auto™
If Android Auto™ is active, you can change the
sound settings in the radio menu.
X
To call up the radio menu: press the $
button.
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Radio: turn and press the controller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
Change the sound settings.
122
Android Auto™
Telephone
Activating the voice control system
for Android Auto™
If Android Auto™ is active, you can start the
mobile phone's voice control system.
X
Press and hold the ? button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
Depending on the mobile phone a tone
sounds.
Ending Android Auto™
X
Terminate the USB connection between the
mobile phone and the multimedia system.
The No
Android Auto Device Connected
Please ensure that your device is
connected to the correct USB port.
message appears in the multifunction display
Transmitted vehicle data
When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle
data are transmitted to the mobile phone. This
makes it possible to use selected mobile phone
services efficiently. The mobile phone does not
have active access to vehicle data.
The following system information is transmitted:
R
Vehicle model
R
Vehicle model year
R
Multimedia system software version
These data are transmitted in order to optimize
communication between the vehicle and mobile
phone.
A random vehicle code is generated for this pur-
pose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to
the mobile phone.
This code is not related to the vehicle identifi-
cation number (VIN) and is deleted if the multi-
media system is reset (
Y page 43).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
R
Gear position engaged
R
Difference between parked, stationary,
coasting and driving
R
Instrument cluster day/night mode
These data are transmitted in order to adapt the
content displayed to the driving situation.
The following position data is transmitted:
R
GPS coordinates
R
Speed
R
Compass direction
R
Acceleration direction
R
Gyroscopic effects
These data are transmitted only when naviga-
ti
on i
s active in order to improve navigation (e.g.
when driving through a tunnel).
If you do not wish to have your vehicle data
transmitted, you can deactivate automatic start-
ing of Android Auto™ (
Y page 122) and briefly
terminate the mobile phone's USB connection
to the vehicle.
Android Auto™
123
Telephone
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are driving when operating
the system.
General notes
Connection difficulties while the vehi-
cle is in motion
The connection may be lost if:
R
the mobile phone network coverage is insuf-
ficient
R
the vehicle has moved into a mobile phone
cell with no free channels
R
the SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
Function restrictions (Canada)
You will not be able to use the Mercedes-Benz
Apps and Internet connection, or will no longer
be able to use them, or may have to wait before
using them, in the following situations:
R
if your mobile phone is switched off
R
if your mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the multimedia system and the desired
mobile phone is supposed to be connected
via Bluetooth
®
R
if the Bluetooth
®
function is switched off on
the mobile phone and the phone is supposed
to be connected via Bluetooth
®
R
if either the mobile phone network or the
mobile phone does not allow simultaneous
use of a phone and an Internet connection
R
if the mobile phone has not been enabled for
Internet access via Bluetooth
®
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
It is possible that you may not be able to
receive calls when an Internet connection is
active. This depends on the mobile phone and
the mobile phone network used.
Conditions for access
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet
access, mbrace must be activated and opera-
tional. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated
for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access.
Take note of the connection priorities. An emer-
gency call has the highest priority. When a ser-
vice call, e.g. a breakdown service call or the MB
Info Call, is active, an emergency call can still be
initiated. A service call, on the other hand, has
priority over a current Internet connection.
Therefore, you cannot establish an Internet con-
nection during a service call.
Canada: a mobile phone must be connected via
Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) with the multimedia sys-
tem. Furthermore, you need a valid mobile ser-
vice contract with a data option, which is used to
calculate the associated connection costs.
124
Conditions for access
Online and Internet functions
Conditions for a Bluetooth
®
connection:
R
The mobile phone supports at least one of the
Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN (Dial-Up Network-
ing) or PAN (Personal Area Network).
The Bluetooth
®
profiles DUN and PAN enable
the Internet connection of the mobile phone
to be made available to the system.
The terms of use are shown when the system is
used for the first time and then once a year
thereafter. Only read and accept the terms of
use when the vehicle is stationary.
The driver is not permitted to call up websites
while driving and use of the Mercedes-Benz
Apps is restricted.
i
The availability of individual Mercedes-Benz
Apps may vary depending on the country.
Setting up an Internet connection
(Canada)
Procedure and general information
USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet
access, mbrace must be activated and opera-
tional. Furthermore, mbrace must be activated
for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access.
No further settings are required.
Canada: in order to set up a mobile phone for
Internet access, your mobile phone must be
connected via Bluetooth
®
(Y page 92) to the
multimedia system. If you are using Internet
access for the first time, you must enable the
connected mobile phone for Internet access
(
Y page 125). If the connected mobile phone
supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile, you do not
need to make additional settings. The Internet
connection is established. If the connected
mobile phone does not support the named Blue-
tooth
®
profile, predefined (Y page 126) or man-
ual access data (
Y page 126) must be set.
Enabling the mobile phone for Inter-
net access
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
The device list is displayed.
X
To select Search for Bluetooth Phone:
turn and press the controller.
Mobile phones are displayed that:
R
are connected to the multimedia system
R
fulfill the conditions for the Internet func-
tions
R
have not yet been set up for the Internet
function
X
To select a mobile phone from the device list:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth
®
PAN profile, Internet access is set up. You can
use the Internet functions.
If the connected mobile phone does not sup-
port the named Bluetooth
®
profile, prede-
fined (
Y page 126) or personalized access
data (
Y page 126) must be set.
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
125
Online and Internet functions
Z
Setting access data of the mobile
phone network provider
Selecting the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
X
To select Predefined Settings: turn and
press the controller.
A list of countries appears.
X
To select Confirm Settings : turn and press
the controller.
If the data is not correct, you can edit the set-
tings (
Y page 127).
If the mobile phone network provider provides
multiple access data options, the relevant
access data still has to be selected. This
depends on the data package used, for example.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected. Establishing a con-
nection (
Y page 128).
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Manually setting the access data of the
mobile phone network provider
X
To select Manual Settings: turn and press
the controller.
An overview of the provider settings appears.
X
Set access data (Y page 126).
X
To select Confirm Settings : turn and press
the controller.
The access data for the mobile phone network
provider is selected once for the mobile phone
connected and is loaded again each time the
mobile phone is connected.
You must set the access data of the mobile
phone network provider who provides the SIM
card and the associated data package (access
settings) for the connected mobile phone. The
access data remains the same when you are in a
different country (roaming). The access data of
another network is not selected.
Setting access data
Set the access data in accordance with your
data package. You can contact your mobile
phone network provider to obtain the precise
access data.
Explanation of the access data
Input field Meaning
Phone Num‐
ber:
Access number for estab-
lishing the connection
The access number
depends on the mobile
phone used. For GSM/
UMTS mobile phones,
*99***1#
is used as a
standard.
Access
Point:
APN network access point
(Access Point Name)
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers and mobile
phones.
PDP Type:
Internet protocol used.
You can obtain this infor-
mation from your mobile
phone network provider.
User ID:
The user identification can
be obtained from your
mobile phone network pro-
vider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
Password:
The password can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
Entry is not necessary for
all mobile phone network
providers.
126
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
Online and Internet functions
Input field Meaning
Auto DNS:
Automatic allocation of
DNS servers is activated. If
the function is deactivated,
the DNS server addresses
must be entered manually.
DNS (Domain Name
Service).
DNS1:
DNS2:
Fields for entering the DNS
server addresses manually.
The address can be
obtained from your mobile
phone network provider.
Managing existing access data
Calling up the device list
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Configure Internet Settings:
turn and press the controller.
The device list is displayed.
Editing the access data
The mobile phone must be connected with the
system for the access data to be changed.
When the Internet connection is active, you can-
not edit or delete the access data of the cur-
rently set mobile phone network provider.
X
Call up the device list (Y page 127).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Change Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
X
Select Predefined Settings or Manual
Settings.
The provider settings are displayed.
In order to edit the access data of the mobile
phone network provider you have two options:
R
Option 1: select the predefined access data of
the mobile phone network provider
(
Y page 126).
R
Option 2: manually set the access data of the
mobile phone network provider (
Y page 126).
Canceling Internet access permission
for a mobile phone
X
Call up the device list (Y page 127).
X
To highlight the desired mobile phone in the
device list: turn the controller.
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Delete Configuration: turn and
press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you wish to
delete the Internet configuration.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The Internet access permission for the mobile
phone is now canceled. The mobile phone can
now no longer be used by the system for
Internet functions.
Setting up an Internet connection (Canada)
127
Online and Internet functions
Z
Establishing/ending the connection
Establishing the connection
Read the conditions for establishing a connec-
tion (
Y page 124).
A connection can be established, for example
by:
R
entering a web address
R
calling up a Mercedes-Benz App
R
calling up a favorite
Ending the connection
X
Press Cancel in the connections window.
Connection status
:
Display of existing connection and signal
strength of the mobile phone network
In most cases, the current connection status is
then shown in the status bar when you switch to
another main function.
Detailed connection status
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select Settings: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Connection Status: turn and
press the controller.
The following information is displayed:
R
the volume of transferred data
R
connection status
R
the device name of the mobile phone
R
name of provider
Ending the connection
USA: you cannot cancel the connection your-
self. The Internet connection is automatically
terminated if the system does not recognize any
user input within a five-minute time period.
Canada:
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select ©: turn and press the controller.
If the mobile phone Internet connection is can-
celed, the multimedia system tries to reconnect.
You should therefore always end the connection
in the multimedia system.
Mercedes-Benz Apps
General notes
To be able to use Mercedes-Benz Apps, you have
to register and confirm the terms and condi-
tions.
Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
128
Mercedes-Benz Apps
Online and Internet functions
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Mercedes-Benz Apps: turn and
press the controller.
X
To call up the app: turn and press the con-
troller.
You can find further Mercedes-Benz Apps and
information under:
http://apps.mercedes-benz.com/apps/
i
The available features are country-depend-
ent.
License fees may be applicable.
Voice-operated control of Mercedes-
Benz Apps
The following apps can be operated using the
voice-operated control system:
R
Weather
R
Online search
R
TuneIn Radio
X
Call up a Mercedes-Benz app (Y page 128).
X
To use voice-operated control: select o.
X
Say the question or prompt.
i
The voice-operated control system is not
available in all countries.
Web browser
Calling up a website
Function restrictions
Internet pages cannot be shown while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Entering a web address
X
To call up the telephone menu: press the
% button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu with the Internet functions is dis-
played.
X
To select www: turn and press the controller.
An input menu for the web address is dis-
played.
X
Enter characters using the controller or the
number keypad.
X
To finish entry and call up a website: select
¬.
Selecting a web address from the list
X
When the character bar is displayed, slide
5 the controller.
X
To select the desired web address: turn and
press the controller.
The web address can still be changed as
desired.
X
To call up a website: select ¬.
The website is called up.
Web browser
129
Online and Internet functions
Z
Navigating the website
Step Result
X
Turn the controller. Navigates from one
selectable item (e.g.
link, text field or
menu) to the next and
highlights the respec-
tive element on the
website.
Sliding the controller:
X
Left or right 1
X
Up or down 4
X
Diagonally 2
Moves the pointer on
the page.
X
Press the control-
ler.
Opens the selected
item.
X
Press %. Calls up the menu.
Menu functions
:
Closes the browser
;
Back or forwards
=
Updates or cancels
?
URL entry
A
Favorites
B
Options
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To call up the Options menu: select 3 by
turning and pressing the controller.
X
To close the website: select &.
X
To call up the previous website: select
t.
X
To call up the next website: select u.
X
To refresh the website: select ø.
The website is refreshed. This procedure may
take some time.
i
While the website is loading, a cross
appears in the menu. This can be used to can-
cel the loading procedure.
X
To enter a URL: select g.
X
Enter a web address (URL) (Y page 129).
X
Favorites: select f.
The Favorites menu appears (
Y page 132).
Options menu
Adding to bookmarks
Adds the current website to the favorites. The
website can then be called up using the menu.
You can store up to 20 favorites in the menu.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks.
The The page has been added to your
bookmarks. message appears.
Current URL
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Current URL.
The URL appears.
Zoom
You can use this function to enlarge web pages.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Zoom.
X
To navigate on the web page: slide 1,
4 or 2 the controller.
X
To zoom in on the web page: turn the control-
ler.
Jumping from link to link
You can use this function to skip from one link to
the next on a website.
130
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Jump From Link To Link.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor jumps from link to
link.
Directional scrolling
You can use this function to scroll up and down
on the web page.
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Directional Scrolling.
If a website has been called up and the con-
troller is turned, the cursor moves up or down
depending on the direction of the turn.
Settings
Overview
X
To show the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Settings.
You can activate or deactivate the following set-
tings:
R
Download Images Automatically
It may take some time to download the con-
tents of websites that contain a large amount
of images. Therefore, it may be useful to deac-
tivate this option.
R
Block Pop-Ups
Pop-ups are windows (usually with advertise-
ments) which are displayed automatically
when you call up a website. You can block
these displays.
R
Activate Javascript
Javascript makes it possible to display and
interact with dynamic content on the website.
R
Allow Cookies
Some websites save information in small text
files (cookies) on your system. You can deter-
mine whether cookies may be stored.
R
Enable Internet Audio
You can switch the browser's audio playback
on or off here.
R
Hide Scroll Bars
You can show or hide the scroll bar here.
R
Show Link Target
You can display the link's URL here.
R
Character Size
You can select the font size which is used
when displaying the website.
R
Character Code
You can select a different character set here,
e.g. if the characters of a website appear dis-
torted.
Changing settings
X
To select the desired setting: turn and press
the controller.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Changing the character size or character
code
X
Select Character Size or Character Code.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
i
If you change the settings, the websites may
not be displayed correctly.
Deleting private data
X
Press the % button.
X
To switch to the main function bar: slide 5
the controller.
X
To select Tel/®: press the controller.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
Web browser
131
Online and Internet functions
Z
X
To select Settings: slide 6, turn and press
the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Delete Private Data: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select the setting you require: turn and
press the controller.
or
X
Select Delete All Data On Exit.
Switch the setting on O or off ª.
Option Function
All
Deletes all personal
data.
Cache
Deletes data in the
cache.
Cookies
Deletes cookies that
are created by web-
sites which you have
called up.
URL History
Deletes all websites
visited (path).
O Delete All
Data On Exit
If this function is acti-
vated O, all personal
data is deleted when
you exit the Internet
browser.
Favorites
Introduction
Favorites are frequently visited websites.
Creating favorites
Adding a favorite in the menu
X
Press the % button.
The last function called up appears.
X
To select Tel/® in the main function bar:
slide 5, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu for the Internet functions appears.
X
Select www.
X
Enter the web address (URL) and name using
the character bar and press ¬.
Adding to favorites
X
To call up the menu: press the % button.
X
To select 3: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Add to Bookmarks (Y page 130).
Selecting favorites
X
Press the % button.
The last function called up appears.
X
To select Tel/® in the main function bar:
slide 5, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu for the Internet functions appears.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
Select the desired bookmark.
The favorite is opened in a new window.
Editing favorites
X
Press the % button.
The last function called up appears.
X
To select Tel/® in the main function bar:
slide 5, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu for the Internet functions appears.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
To bring the desired favorites to the front.
X
To select Edit: slide 6 and press the con-
troller.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter a web address (URL).
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Select p.
X
Press the touchpad or controller.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Enter a name.
132
Web browser
Online and Internet functions
Deleting favorites
X
Press the % button.
The last function called up appears.
X
To select Tel/® in the main function bar:
slide 5, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select Internet: turn and press the con-
troller.
The menu for the Internet functions appears.
X
To select the Internet Favorites menu:
turn and press the controller.
The Favorites menu appears.
X
To bring the desired favorites to the front.
X
To select Delete: slide 6 and press the
controller.
A prompt appears.
X
Select Yes.
The favorite is deleted.
Closing the browser
X
Select % in the browser menu
(
Y page 130)
or
X
Press the % button for longer than two
seconds.
A prompt appears, asking whether you want
to close the Internet browser.
X
Select Yes.
The application is closed.
Web browser
133
Online and Internet functions
Z
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Switching on the radio
X
Press the $ button.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
selected.
Switching HD Radio on/off
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
Select Options .
X
By selecting O or ª in front of HD Radio,
you determine whether HD radio is switched
on or off.
If HD Radio is switched off, the system does not
switch to digital radio and it is not possible to
select any sub-channels.
i
HD Radio Technology Manufactured
Under License From iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S.
and Foreign Patents. The HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.
Overview
:
Main function bar
;
Status bar with compass display
=
Main display field with available stations and
relevant information
?
Display of radio station selected
A
Radio menu bar
The following functions are available using the
radio main function bar:
R
HD Radio FM: HD FM radio mode
R
HD Radio AM: HD MW radio mode
R
Sat Radio: satellite radio
R
Info on Radio: information on radio in the
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Radio Station Presets: 100 preset posi-
tions for radio stations
The following functions are available using the
radio menu bar:
R
Options: radio options
R
è: searches for stations by name
R
Preset: station presets menu
R
Band: selects wavebands
R
Information: displays additional informa-
tion about the current station (radio text or
Artist Experience
®
)
R
à: sound settings, harman/kardon
®
Logic
7
®
Surround, Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG
sound system
134
Overview
Radio
Setting the waveband
X
In radio mode: press the $ button.
A menu appears with a selection of HD
Radio FM, HD Radio AM, Sat Radio, Info
on Radio and Radio Station Presets.
X
Turn the controller until the required wave-
band is in the center. Press the controller.
Station
Selecting a station
Using the main display field
All currently available stations are displayed.
X
In radio mode, turn the controller until the
desired station is in the center.
Using the current station list
X
In radio mode, press the controller.
The station list appears with the stations cur-
rently available.
X
To select the desired station: turn and press
the controller.
i
The loudspeaker symbol in front of a station
indicates the currently set station.
Using frequency entry
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Enter Frequency.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
or
X
Press the g key on the number keypad.
An input field appears.
X
Enter the frequency of the desired station in
the entry field.
Using the search function
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
Select è and enter the first letters of the
required station using the controller.
X
Press OK to confirm.
A list with available stations appears.
X
To select stations from the list: turn the con-
troller and press to confirm.
Activating/deactivating the station
presets display
Activating
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
A view of the last waveband you listened to
appears.
Station
135
Radio
Saving/deleting a station
Storing current stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select the Save Current Station/Chan‐
nel option: turn and press the controller.
X
To select the position of the required preset
entry: turn and press the controller.
or
X
Select the Edit Station Preset option.
X
Select the position of the required preset:
turn the controller.
This can also be a preset position that is
already occupied, which is then overwritten
by the current station.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
X
To select the Save Current Station/Chan‐
nel option: turn and press the controller.
The currently set station is stored in the selec-
ted preset position. A tone signals a success-
ful preset entry.
or
X
Set the desired station in radio mode.
X
Press and hold down the preset number to be
assigned on the number keypad until a tone
confirms the storing process.
X
If the preset number has two digits, press the
first digit briefly and then press and hold down
the second digit.
or
X
Set the desired station in radio mode.
X
Press and hold the controller until the preset
list appears.
X
To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
A tone confirms that the storing process was
successful.
Moving highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
An additional menu appears.
X
To select the Move Highlighted Station/
Channel option: turn and press the control-
ler.
The list of stored stations appears again.
X
To move the highlighted station to the new
position: turn the controller and press to con-
firm.
Deleting highlighted stations
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select the Delete Highlighted Sta‐
tion/Channel option in the additional menu:
turn and press the controller.
or
X
Press the $ button.
A prompt appears.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The highlighted station is deleted.
or
X
To select No: press the controller.
The process is canceled.
i
Frequencies have already been stored in the
multimedia system. There are 100 preset
positions available.
136
Station
Radio
Tagging music tracks
This function allows you to transfer the music
track currently playing to an Apple
®
device and
then purchase it in the iTunes store
®
.
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Tag This Track.
A message appears in the multimedia system
about storing the track information.
Displaying station information
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
With O or ª in front of Show Station
Information you can determine whether the
station name should be displayed.
If the function is active, the artist and track
will also be displayed in the main display field.
Calling up sound settings
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
The radio menu bar appears.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The sound menu appears (
Y page 165).
Displaying information
This function is available in HD FM radio and HD
AM radio mode.
Reception is only possible if the radio stations
provide the relevant information.
X
To select Information in the radio menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the track that is currently being played
R
the artist of the track that is currently being
played
R
the album name
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the logo of the station or Artist Experience
®
Back to radio display:
X
To select Information: slide 6 and press
the controller.
or
X
Press the % button.
Satellite radio
General notes
The satellite radio mode requires satellite radio
equipment and registration with a satellite radio
provider.
Note that the categories and channels shown in
the illustrations depend on the program content
offered by the provider. The illustrations and
descriptions in these operating instructions may
therefore differ from the channels and catego-
ries offered by the provider.
Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail-
able or interrupted for a variety of reasons.
These include environmental or topographical
conditions as well as other factors beyond the
control of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. This means
operation may not be possible in certain areas.
These include:
R
tunnels
R
parking garages
R
locations inside or next to buildings
R
locations in the vicinity of other structures
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio offers more than 140
digital-quality radio channels, providing 100%
commercial-free music, sports, news and enter-
tainment.
Satellite radio
137
Radio
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-
performance satellites to broadcast around the
clock throughout the USA and Canada.
The satellite radio program is available for a
monthly fee. Details are available from the Sirius
XM
®
Service Center and at
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
Your new Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with
Sirius XM
®
Satellite Radio pre-installed at the
factory. This service is free for a six-month trial
period. About a month before the trial period
ends, information will be provided on how to
extend this subscription. An acoustic signal
sounds and a message is shown, describing how
the subscription can be extended.
i
Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names
and logos are the property of their respective
owners. All rights reserved.
Registering satellite radio
:
Phone number of provider
;
Sirius XM
®
ID of your satellite receiver
X
Switch on SatRadio mode (Y page 138).
The satellite radio main menu appears show-
ing the preview channel. You cannot select
any other stations.
X
To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The service information screen appears.
Once the telephone connection has been estab-
lished:
X
Follow the instructions of the service staff.
The activation process may take up to
10 minutes. If the activation is completed
successfully, the Updating Channels...
message appears in the display, followed by
the satellite radio main menu.
i
You can also have the satellite service acti-
vated online. To do this, visit
http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or
http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
i
If registration is not included when purchas-
ing the system, your credit card details will be
required to activate your account.
If the satellite receiver is not installed correctly,
the Device
Unavailable message will appear.
Switching to satellite radio
X
To show the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Radio: turn and press the controller.
The radio display appears. You will hear the
last station played on the last waveband
selected.
X
To select Radio in radio mode: slide 5 and
press the controller.
The menu with the available radio modes
appears.
X
To select Sat Radio: turn and press the con-
troller.
The No
Service message appears if there is no
signal.
138
Satellite radio
Radio
Satellite radio overview
:
Main function bar
;
Preset
=
Channel name and channel number
?
Channel information
A
Station presets menu
B
Category list
C
Keyword search
D
Options menu
Channel information ? can be viewed in detail
(
Y page 142).
Selecting a category
Satellite radio channels are sorted into catego-
ries. You can choose between various catego-
ries such as News/Discussions, Sports and
Country (if available). The category list is sorted
alphabetically. The content of the categories is
sorted by channel numbers.
X
To call up the category list: select Cate‐
gory in the menu bar by turning and pressing
the controller.
The category list appears.
X
To select a category: turn the controller and
press to confirm.
The category selected is shown in the display.
You hear the channel last selected for this
category.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
When you select a specific category, the
channels are filtered exclusively according to
this category. Select the All Channels
cat-
egory in order to see all of the available chan-
nels. Only this category enables you to
browse all available stations.
Selecting a channel
Changing channels
X
When the display/selection window in the
satellite radio display is selected, slide 1
or turn the controller.
The multimedia system switches to the next
available channel.
Entering channel numbers directly
X
To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
The satellite radio menu appears.
X
To select Enter Channel : turn and press the
controller.
An input menu appears.
X
Enter the desired channel in the entry field.
or
X
Press the g key on the number keypad.
An input menu appears.
X
For the channel number, press the corre-
sponding number keys on the control panel
one after the other.
X
Press the z key on the number keypad.
The multimedia system sets the selected
channel.
i
You can only select currently permitted dig-
its.
Selecting a channel via the satellite
radio station list
You can select the channel using the station list
displaying the artists and tracks that are cur-
rently playing.
Satellite radio
139
Radio
X
To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Station List with Artist &
Title : turn and press the controller.
The channel list appears.
or
X
Press the controller in the main display field.
X
Select the desired channel
Keyword search
X
To select the keyword search è in the
menu bar: turn and press the controller.
X
To enter the required search term: turn and
press the controller.
Direct and indirect results are shown.
X
Select the required result.
The relevant channel is played.
Memory functions
i
There are 100 presets available.
X
To store a channel using the edit function:
select Preset
in the radio menu bar by turn-
ing and pressing the controller.
X
To select Edit Station Preset: turn and
press the controller.
The list of saved channels appears.
X
To select the preset: turn the controller and
press for about 2 seconds.
The newly saved channel overwrites the exist-
ing preset.
or
X
To quick store: press and hold number key 2,
for example.
The channel is saved to the second position in
the radio channel presets.
or
X
Set the desired channel in satellite radio
mode.
X
Press and hold the controller until the preset
list appears.
X
To select the preset number: turn and press
the controller.
A tone confirms that the storing process was
successful.
Deleting the highlighted channel
X
To select Preset in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Edit Station Preset.
X
To select the required preset entry: turn the
controller.
X
Slide 9 the controller.
X
To select the Delete Highlighted Sta‐
tion/Channel option in the additional menu:
turn and press the controller.
or
X
Press the $ button.
A prompt appears.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The highlighted station is deleted.
or
X
To select No: press the controller.
The process is canceled.
Activating/deactivating the station
presets display
You can use this function to change to the sta-
tion presets display.
Activating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Station Preset View: On: turn
and press the controller.
The station preset display appears.
X
To switch between the stored stations: turn
the controller.
Deactivating
X
In radio mode: slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Preset : turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Station Preset View: Off: turn
and press the controller.
A view of the last waveband you listened to
appears.
140
Satellite radio
Radio
Music and sports alerts
General notes
This function makes it possible to store a pro-
gram alert for your favorite artists, tracks or
sporting events.
You can store up to 30 music and sports alerts
(favorites).
Music alerts can only be saved whilst a track is
being played. You can also specify sports alerts
via the menu option. The system then continu-
ously searches through all the channels. If a
match is found with a saved message, you will
be informed. A window appears with the respec-
tive information.
Setting a music alert
X
To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event : turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Add New AlertAdd New Alert .
A window with a prompt appears.
X
Select Artist or Track.
The alert is set for the current artist or track.
i
If an alert cannot be set, the No Alerts
Available message appears.
Setting a sports alert
X
To select Options in the menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event : turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Sports Alerts .
A menu appears.
X
Select Select New AlertsSelect New
Alerts .
A menu appears.
X
Select the desired team from a league, e.g.
college, NBA, NHL, NFL or MLB.
The alert function for the sports team is
added.
A window with music and sport alerts
appears
X
To select Change To or Ignore: turn and
press the controller.
If you select Change To
, the channel is
changed and the favorite artist or track is
played.
If you select Ignore
, the current channel will
continue playing.
Editing music and sports alerts
X
To select Alert for Artist, Track &
Sports Event : turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
Select Manage Music Alerts or Manage
Sports Alerts .
A list of set alerts appears.
Switching music and sport alerts on/off
X
With O or ª in front of Activate Music
Alerts you can determine whether music
alerts should be switched on or off.
X
With O or ª in front of Activate Sports
Alerts you can determine whether sport
alerts should be switched on or off.
Tagging music tracks
If the channel supports this function, you are
able to transfer the music track currently playing
to an Apple
®
device. You can then purchase it in
the iTunes
®
store.
X
To select Options in the radio menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
X
To select Tag This Track: turn and press
the controller.
A message about saving this music track on
the Apple
®
device appears.
Satellite radio
141
Radio
Displaying information
X
To select Info in the radio menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
Information on the currently received pro-
gram is displayed.
If available, you will see:
R
the channel logo
R
the channel abbreviation
R
the artist of the track that is currently being
played
R
the track that is currently being played
R
category
R
composer
X
To return to the radio display: select Info
by sliding 6 and pressing the controller.
Displaying service information
The provider's customer service center is avail-
able by phone at any time to answer any general
questions or questions on the versions availa-
ble.
X
To select Options in the menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
X
To select Service: turn and press the con-
troller.
The Sirius XM
®
ID of your satellite receiver
and the telephone number of the provider
appear.
X
To return to the main display: press the
% button.
Channel list updates
During reception of a new channel list, the
Updating Channels...
message is shown.
The channel last selected is switched to mute
until the update has been completed. Satellite
radio mode is not available during this process.
Once the update has been completed, the sat-
ellite radio basic menu appears. The channel
previously selected will be played if it is still
available.
Sound settings
Information on sound settings (Y page 165).
142
Satellite radio
Radio
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Activating media mode
General notes
There are several ways to activate media sour-
ces using the multimedia system.
The relevant sections of the Operator's Manual
describe the simplest way to activate a media
source.
This section describes all options for activating
media sources.
Connections for external media sour-
ces
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
Two USB ports are located in the stowage
space under the armrest.
R
CD
R
DVD video
R
SD cards
R
Devices with Bluetooth
®
connection
Activating media using the button
X
Press the Õ button.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
X
Press the Õ button again.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select media sources: turn the controller
until the desired media source is in the center.
Press the controller.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol-
lowing media sources will be available:
R
Disc
R
Memory Card
R
Media Interface 1
R
Media Interface 2
R
Bluetooth Audio
Switching on automatically
When an external media source is connected,
CD and SD memory card functions are automat-
ically switched on by the multimedia system.
When using with USB devices, switch to the
respective basic display.
If playable music files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
i
If a media function is already switched on in
the multimedia system, this will be interrup-
ted. The basic display of the newly connected
device will appear (except when using with
USB/iPod
®
). If another function, such as nav-
igation, is being operated, the basic display
will not change.
Activating media using the main func-
tion bar
X
To display the main function bar: slide 5 the
controller.
X
To select Media: turn and press the controller.
The last media source you have set is dis-
played.
Activating media mode
143
Media
X
To select Media in media mode: slide 5 and
press the controller.
The menu appears with the available media
sources.
X
To select the media source: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
Activating media using the number
keypad
X
To select a media source: press the corre-
sponding number key.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
X
To enter the track number: press the g
button.
A menu appears.
X
Use the number keypad to enter the track
number.
The track is played.
Use the s button to show the track infor-
mation for the track that is currently playing.
Activating media using the device list
X
In Media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Devices: turn and press the con-
troller.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
If the media source contains music or video
files, these will be played. The corresponding
basic menu will be shown.
Audio/video mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Notes on audio/video mode
Permissible data carriers
R
CD audio, CD-R and CD-RW
R
DVD video, DVD-R and DVD-RW (audio for-
mats PCM DTS
®
and Dolby
®
Digital)
R
SD card
R
USB storage device
R
Apple
®
devices
i
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
i
For DTS patents see
http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited.
DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS
Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
144
Audio/video mode
Media
Permissible file systems
R
ISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs
R
UDF for video DVDs
R
FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS for SD card
and USB storage media
R
HFS and HFS+ for Apple
®
devices
i
Writing access is not possible on NTFS.
Multisession CDs
For multisession CDs, the content of the first
session determines how the multimedia system
processes the CD. The multimedia system only
plays back one session and gives priority to the
first session on the CD.
File structure of a data carrier
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, the tracks can be organized in folders. A
folder may also contain subfolders. The disc
may contain no more than eight directory levels
(a root and seven sub-levels). Files beyond the
eighth level will not be recognized by the sys-
tem.
i
The multimedia system supports up to
25,000 files for all of the connected sources.
Track and file names
When you create a disc with compressed music
files, you can assign names to the tracks and
folders.
You should observe the following when assign-
ing track names:
R
track names must have at least one character
R
track names must have an extension of a sup-
ported audio or video format, e.g. mp3, aac or
m4v.
R
there must be a dot between the track name
and the extension
Example of a correct track name:
"Track1.mp3".
Permissible formats
The multimedia system supports the following
audio and video formats:
Audio for-
mats
MP3, WMA, CDA, AAC for-
mats (.aac, .mp4, .m4a
and .m4b)
Video for-
mats
DVD-V, MPEG, WMV, M4V,
AVI up to 720p
Copy-protected iTunes
®
music files with
the .m4p file extension are not supported.
Permissible bit and sampling rates
The multimedia system supports MP3 and WMA
files of the following type:
Format Bit rates [kbit/
s]
Sampling
rates [kHz]
MP3 32-320
(fixed and varia-
ble bit rates)
8-48
WMA 5-384
(fixed and varia-
ble bit rates)
8-48
The multimedia system does not support WMA
files of the following type:
R
DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted
files
R
WMA Pro
R
5.1 surround sound
i
Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least
128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least
44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a noticeable
deterioration in quality. This is especially the
case if you have activated a surround sound
function.
Selecting an active partition (USB mass
storage devices only)
You can select this function for USB storage
devices if the storage device is partitioned. Up
to 9 partitions (primary or logical, FAT, FAT32,
exFAT and NTFS) are supported.
Audio/video mode
145
Media
Z
Selecting an active partition
X
Select a USB storage device (Y page 143).
X
To select Options in the media menu bar:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Select Active Partition.
Notes on copyright
Audio or video files that you create or reproduce
yourself for playback are generally subject to
copyright protection.
In many countries, reproductions, even for pri-
vate use, are not permitted without the prior
consent of the copyright holder.
Make sure that you know about the applicable
copyright regulations and that you comply with
these.
Notes on CDs/DVDs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
Discs with copy protection are not compatible
with the audio CD standard and therefore may
not be able to be played.
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs.
There may be playback problems if you play CDs
that you have copied yourself with a storage
capacity of more than 700 MB.
Menu overview
:
Main function bar
;
Display for the active data medium
=
Media menu bar
?
Title display in the media list
A
Current track and number in the track list
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Album cover (if available)
Inserting and removing a disc from
the single CD/DVD drive
Inserting
X
Press the þ button on the single drive.
If there is a disc already inserted, it will be
ejected.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
The drive closes and the disc is played.
If the CD or DVD is started in Media mode, the
corresponding basic menu will be shown. If
the CD or DVD is started from another appli-
cation (e.g. navigation), the display will not
change.
i
The drive may not be able to play discs with
copy protection.
Removing
X
Press the þ button.
The drive ejects the disc.
X
Take the disc out of the slot.
If you do not take the disc out of the slot, it is
drawn in again automatically after a short
while.
146
Audio/video mode
Media
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD
changer
The DVD changer has a magazine with six trays.
Inserting a CD/DVD into the magazine tray
X
Press the V button.
The magazine menu appears.
X
To switch to the disc view: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X
To select the magazine tray: turn the control-
ler and press to confirm.
or
X
Press number buttons (1-6) on the multime-
dia system.
The DVD changer switches to the selected
magazine tray.
The Please Wait... message appears.
You will then see the Please
insert disc 1.
message.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
Loading all empty magazine trays
X
To show the magazine menu: press the V
button.
X
To select Load Empty Slots: turn and press
the controller.
The multimedia system switches to the next
empty magazine tray.
The Please Wait...
message appears.
You will then see the Please
insert disc
1. message.
X
Insert a disc into the disc slot with the printed
side facing up.
Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer
switches to the next empty tray.
If insertion of the next disc takes too long, the
disc inserted first will be played.
X
Repeat these steps until all magazine trays
are filled.
The DVD changer plays the first inserted disc.
Exiting the DVD changer menu
X
Press the V button.
Ejecting a CD/DVD from the DVD
changer
:
Active ejection
;
Disc name
=
Type of data medium
If you remove one disc while playing another
disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback. Play-
back resumes after the disc is ejected.
Ejecting a single disc
X
To show the magazine menu: press the V
button.
X
To switch to the disc view: slide 5 the con-
troller.
The current disc is marked.
X
To select a disc: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
or
X
Press number buttons (1-6) on the multime-
dia system.
The DVD changer ejects the disc.
X
Take the disc out of the slot.
Audio/video mode
147
Media
Z
Ejecting all CDs/DVDs
X
To show the magazine menu: press the V
button.
X
Select Eject All.
The last active disc is ejected.
The Please remove disc 1.
message
appears.
X
Remove the disc.
X
Repeat the last step until the magazine is
empty.
If you take too long removing the disc, the disc
is re-loaded.
Exiting a menu
X
Press the V button.
or
X
Select % in the magazine menu.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.
If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-
tion immediately.
!
If you are no longer using the SD card, you
should remove it and store it outside the vehi-
cle. High temperatures can damage the card.
The multimedia system supports SD cards
(Secure Digital), SDHC cards (Secure Digital
High Capacity), and SDXC cards (Secure Digital
eXtended Capacity.
Inserting an SD card
X
Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the
control panel until the SD card engages. The
side with the contacts must face down.
The medium is played and the files are loaded
in the background. If there are no supported
audio or video files, you will see a message to
this effect.
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
The SD card is ejected.
X
Remove the SD card.
Connecting USB devices
Two USB ports are located in the stowage space
under the armrest (
Y page 143).
X
Connect the USB device with a suitable USB
port.
If the corresponding media display is visible,
the medium is played and the files are loaded
in the background. Otherwise, the system
does not automatically switch to USB. If there
are no supported audio or video files, you will
see a message to this effect.
i
MP3 players must support Media Transfer
Protocol (MTP).
Selecting the playback option
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
Playing similar tracks
i
This option is available as soon as the music
collection has been read and analyzed.
X
To select Play More Like This: turn and
press the controller.
Selecting Play mode
X
To select Playback Mode: turn and press the
controller.
X
Select Normal Track Sequence.
The current track list is played in the order it is
stored on the data medium.
X
Select Random Track List.
The current track list is played in random
order.
X
Select Random Medium.
All tracks on the data medium are played in
random order.
148
Audio/video mode
Media
Skip to time
X
To select Skip to Time: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears.
X
To set the time: turn the controller.
or
X
Set the desired time using the number key-
pad.
Selecting an active partition
X
To select Select Active Partition: turn
and press the controller.
With the Select
Active Partition option,
you can select a partition in the current USB
data medium.
Showing track information
X
To switch the Show Track Information
function on O or off ª: turn and press the
controller.
You display or hide information for Track,
Artist and Album in the main display field.
If the function is deactivated, the file name
and the folder name of the track are dis-
played.
Entering a track number directly
X
To enter the track number:press the g
button.
A menu appears.
X
Use the number keypad to enter the desired
track number.
The track is played.
Pausing/continuing playback
X
To pause playback: in audio or video mode,
slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ë in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is interrupted. The display changes
to Ì.
X
To continue playback: in audio or video
mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Ì in the media menu bar: turn
and press the controller.
Playback is continued from the point of inter-
ruption. The symbol changes to Ë.
Selecting a track
Selecting a track using the current
track list
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the basic display.
The category list appears.
Select the current track list.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
Selecting a track by skipping to a track
X
To skip forward or back to a track: turn or
briefly slide 1 the controller in the media
basic display.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X
In the media basic display, press and hold the
E or F button until the desired position
is reached.
Searching for a track
X
In Media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
Audio/video mode
149
Media
Z
X
Select a category, e.g. Genres.
After the category has been chosen, sub-cat-
egories appear depending on the music
tracks available.
X
Select a sub-category, e.g. Rock.
X
Select a track in the sub-category for playing.
All of the tracks in this sub-category are
played.
Gracenote
®
Media Database
General notes
This function is available in CD audio, MP3 and
iPod
®
mode.
There is a version of Gracenote
®
music recog-
nition technology, Emeryville, California, USA on
the hard disk of the multimedia system. You will
recognize this by the logo in the bottom right-
hand corner of certain audio displays. If the
audio CD does not contain any CD text informa-
tion, the multimedia system can use the Grace-
note
®
Media Database to identify unknown
audio tracks when in audio CD mode.
In addition, the cover arts for the main display
field, the album list and the "Select by cover"
function from the Gracenote
®
Media Database
are displayed for the music files and the iPod
®
.
This occurs when the cover art is not contained
in the files but in the Gracenote
®
Media Data-
base.
Online prompt for metadata
A connection to the Gracenote
®
Data Server is
made automatically when an audio CD is inser-
ted. The missing data is loaded, saved in the
multimedia system and shown on the display. If
the search for metadata is unsuccessful, no data
can be displayed. If no phone is connected or
configured for data use, this function is unavail-
able.
An Internet connection is required for this
(
Y page 128).
Saving audio CDs
General notes
i
Store your audio CDs in a safe place. Any
malfunction in the multimedia system may
result in the loss of stored files. Mercedes-
Benz is not liable for any loss of data.
No individual music tracks can be stored or
deleted, only a maximum of 12 complete audio
CDs.
If 12 audio CDs are stored, the REC
option in the
Media menu bar is grayed out and has no func-
tion. One audio CD must be deleted before a
new audio CD can be copied.
Copying an audio CD
X
Insert an audio CD.
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To start the copying process: select REC by
turning and pressing the controller.
X
To select Start: press the controller.
The copying procedure starts and is shown in
the progress bar.
It may take some time for the copying process
to be completed, depending on the amount of
data.
If the copying process is successful, the
Music files copied.
message appears
X
To cancel copying: select Cancel.
The files copied up to the point of cancellation
are lost.
i
During the copying process, you can switch
to another function (e.g. radio) or to another
media source (e.g. USB). The copying proce-
dure continues in the background. It is how-
ever not possible to select another CD in the
CD changer.
Playing stored audio CDs
X
In Media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
150
Audio/video mode
Media
X
To select Stored Audio CDs in the category
list: turn and press the controller.
A selection list for the copied audio CDs is
displayed.
X
To select the desired audio CD: turn and press
the controller.
The track list is displayed.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
The tracks on the stored audio CDs can also be
found and played using other media search
functions (
Y page 151).
Deleting stored audio CDs
If music is being played from the saved audio
CDs, the function for deleting audio CDs is avail-
able.
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Delete Stored Audio CDs: press
the controller.
A selection list for the stored audio CDs is
displayed.
X
To select the desired audio CD: turn and press
the controller.
The audio CD is deleted.
Media search
General notes
The multimedia system plays back files from the
following data media:
R
Disc (CD/DVD)
R
Memory card
R
USB storage device
R
Apple
®
devices
The categories are displayed according to the
data available. A database is created for the
iPod
®
and a database is created for all of the
other media sources (CD, USB, SD card). During
the search the relevant database is accessed
depending on the active media source.
Starting the media search
X
In Media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
Category list
X
In Media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list is shown.
Depending on the connected media sources and
files, the following categories are listed:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Tracks
R
Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Stored Audio CDs
R
Videos
R
Photos
i
The categories are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these categories
are available more quickly.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year” and “Photos” are not
available.
Searching a track using the current
track list
X
To select Current Tracklist in the cate-
gory list: turn and press the controller.
The selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
Media search
151
Media
Z
Searching for a track via a folder
Playable files can be searched for in the active
data medium's directories.
X
To select Folder in the category list: turn and
press the controller.
The folder list appears.
X
Select the required folder.
Either the desired track list appears or con-
tinue searching in the folder directory until
the desired track list has been found.
X
Select the required track.
Searching for a track via cover view
X
To select Select By Cover in the category
list: turn and press the controller.
A menu with cover views appears.
X
Select the required cover.
Track playback is started automatically.
i
There is a database for iPod
®
and for each of
the other media sources (CD, USB, SD card).
During the search the relevant database is
accessed depending on the active media
source.
Searching for a track via music genre
X
To select Genres in the category list: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system searches in all media
sources. A selection list with Genres
and
media sources appears.
X
Select the desired Genres.
A selection list with music tracks from the
selected genre appears.
X
Select a music track.
The track is played. The basic menu for the
active media source is shown.
X
To exit the selection list: press the % but-
ton.
i
The list is closed automatically once a selec-
tion has been made.
Searching for a track via a keyword
X
To select Keyword Search in the category
list: turn and press the controller.
The input field appears.
X
To select the required characters: turn and
press the controller for each one (
Y page 29).
Entering just part of the name of a track or
artist is enough. The search result then dis-
plays the entire text.
X
Select ¬.
The search results are displayed.
The numbers behind the results, for example
Artists
(1/0), mean: 1 result that contains
the exact keyword searched for and 0 results
are similar.
X
Select one of the results.
Keywords that have already been searched
for are displayed in the "Search history" with-
out having to enter them completely. They
can be accepted directly and displayed in the
search result.
X
Select one entry, e.g. Artists.
The tracks are listed.
X
Select a track.
The basic display appears and playback
starts.
i
If available, the album list and covers are
shown.
i
There is a database for iPod
®
and for each of
the other media sources (CD, USB, SD card).
During the search the relevant database is
accessed depending on the active media
source.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Requirements
The Bluetooth
®
function must be activated in
the multimedia system (
Y page 41).
152
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
Bluetooth
®
audio mode requires a Bluetooth
®
-
capable audio device.
Check your Bluetooth
®
audio device for the fol-
lowing; see the manufacturer's operating
instructions:
R
Bluetooth
®
audio profile
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth
®
audio pro-
files.
R
Bluetooth
®
visibility
Certain Bluetooth
®
audio devices do not just
require activation of the Bluetooth
®
function.
In addition, your device must be made "visi-
ble" to other devices.
R
Bluetooth
®
device name
This device name is predetermined but can
usually be changed. To make a clear selection
of the Bluetooth
®
device possible, we recom-
mend that you customize the device name.
i
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data trans-
mission
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile):
Bluetooth
®
audio profile for audio data play-
back
i
The Bluetooth
®
device must be visible to the
multimedia system for authorization. After
authorization, the multimedia system even
finds the Bluetooth
®
device when it is not
visible.
General notes
Before using your Bluetooth
®
audio device with
the multimedia system for the first time, you will
need to authorize it.
When you authorize a new Bluetooth
®
audio
device, it is connected automatically. Connec-
tion involves first searching for a Bluetooth
®
audio device and then authorizing it.
You can authorize up to 15 Bluetooth
®
devices.
i
If you authorize a mobile phone that sup-
ports Bluetooth
®
audio, the A2DP and AVRCP
Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically.
The mobile phone is then entered:
R
in the Bluetooth
®
telephone list
(
Y page 93)
R
in the Bluetooth
®
audio device list
(
Y page 154)
Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a
mobile phone in Bluetooth
®
telephony
(
Y page 94).
Bluetooth
®
audio basic display
:
Audio transmission status (depending on
the Bluetooth
®
audio device, also title name
and artist)
;
Data medium position in the media list
=
Sound settings
?
Media sources
A
To stop Ë or start Ì playback
B
Name of the connected Bluetooth
®
audio
device (example)
C
Options menu
Switching to Bluetooth
®
audio
X
Press the Õ button.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio in the menu: turn
and press the controller.
The multimedia system activates the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device. The basic display
(
Y page 153) then appears. Playback starts.
If you see the No
Bluetooth Audio Device
Authorized message, you will need to
authorize the Bluetooth
®
audio device first
(
Y page 154).
i
If the connected Bluetooth
®
audio device
supports metadata and if the corresponding
data is available, then the artist, track and
album name can be displayed.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
153
Media
Z
Searching for and authorizing a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
Searching for a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 153).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press
the controller.
A new menu appears.
X
To select Search for Audio Devices:
press the controller.
A message appears.
X
Select Start Search.
The multimedia system searches for Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices within range and adds
them to the Bluetooth
®
device list.
The duration of the search depends on the
number of Bluetooth
®
audio devices within
range and their characteristics.
:
Bluetooth
®
audio player within range and
already authorized
;
Newly detected mobile phone with Blue-
tooth
®
audio mode in range
The Bluetooth
®
device list displays all author-
ized devices, whether they are within range or
not. After a device search, devices which are
within range but not authorized are also dis-
played.
If the multimedia system cannot find your Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, external authorization may
follow (
Y page 154).
Authorizing a Bluetooth
®
audio device
X
Select a Bluetooth
®
audio device that has not
yet been authorized from the list: turn and
press the controller.
Authorization starts.
Depending on which Bluetooth
®
audio device
is being used, the device can be authorized
either by entering a passkey or by Secure
Simple Pairing. You can find information on
this in the "Authorizing (connecting) a mobile
phone" section (
Y page 94).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is connected and starts
playing.
i
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, play-
back must initially be started on the device
itself, so that the multimedia system can play
the audio data. Bluetooth
®
must also be given
as a media output location for the audio
device used.
i
The Bluetooth
®
audio device must support
Bluetooth
®
version 2.1 for connection via
Secure Simple Pairing. The multimedia sys-
tem creates a six-digit code which is dis-
played simultaneously on both devices that
are to be connected.
For some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the pair-
ing must also be confirmed within 10 sec-
onds.
External authorization
If the multimedia system does not find your
Bluetooth
®
audio device, this may be due to
particular security settings on your Bluetooth
®
audio device. In this case, check whether your
Bluetooth
®
audio device can locate the multi-
media system.
The Bluetooth
®
device name of the multimedia
system is MB Bluetooth
.
X
Switch on Bluetooth
®
audio mode
(
Y page 153).
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press
the controller.
154
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
X
To select Connect via Audio Device: turn
and press the controller.
A message appears.
X
Start the authorization on your Bluetooth
®
audio device (see the manufacturer's operat-
ing instructions).
After successful authorization, the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device is connected and starts
playing.
With some Bluetooth
®
audio devices, playback
must initially be started on the device itself, so
that the multimedia system can play the audio
data.
Displaying details
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 154).
X
To select G: slide 9 the controller.
X
To select Details: turn and press the con-
troller.
The following information concerning the
selected mobile phone is shown:
R
Bluetooth
®
name
R
Bluetooth
®
address
R
Availability status (shown after an update)
R
Authorization status
X
To close the detailed display: press the
% button.
Starting/stopping playback
X
To selectstart play back Ì: turn and
press the controller.
Playback starts. Ë is selected.
X
To stop playback:selectË.
A message appears. Ì is selected.
X
To continue playback: select Ì.
A message appears. Ë is selected.
Starting playback if the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been stopped
During the search for mobile phones
(
Y page 93), the connection with the Bluetooth
®
audio device is terminated. The No Bluetooth
Audio Device Connected message appears in
the Bluetooth
®
audio basic display
(
Y page 153). The Connect Last Used Player
message cannot be confirmed.
When the search is finished, the Bluetooth
®
audio device can be reconnected.
X
To select start playback Ì: slide 6
and press the controller.
Playback resumes from the beginning.
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the basic display: press the con-
troller.
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
audio device
used, playback starts immediately or you
must start playback manually.
In this case, you will see the Bluetooth
Audio Device Paused message.
Selecting a track
The function is not supported by all Bluetooth
®
audio devices.
Some mobile phones impair function with
regard to the following criteria:
R
the number of tracks that can be selected.
R
the time period until the next or previous track
is played.
X
Use the multifunction steering wheel to
switch to the media menu in the on-board
computer; see the vehicle Operator's Manual.
X
To skip forward or back to a track: press
the 9 or : button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
X
Rapid scroll: press and hold the 9
or : button on the multifunction steering
wheel until the desired track is reached.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
tons, the rapid scrolling speed increases after
a short time.
Further ways to select tracks (
Y page 149).
i
In rapid scroll, track names are not shown,
but instead only Track1, Track2 etc. The play-
back times for the tracks played are not dis-
played. This is available as an optional func-
tion starting with AVRCP Version 1.3. There is
also no music search option available with
Bluetooth
®
Audio.
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
155
Media
Z
Playback options
General information
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device supports the cor-
responding function, the following options are
available:
R
Normal Track Sequence: the tracks are
played in the normal order (e.g. track 1, 2, 3
etc.).
Audio data playback is determined by the
order in which the tracks are written to the
data medium. Alphabetical order is the most
common. Once all the tracks in a folder have
been played, the tracks in the next folder are
played.
R
Random Track List: the current track list is
played in random order (e.g. 3, 8, 5 etc.).
R
Random Medium: all tracks on the data
medium are played in random order (e.g.
track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
Playback options are optional functions and
are not, or only partially, supported by Blue-
tooth
®
audio devices.
Selecting the playback option
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Playback Mode.
A # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the desired option.
Increasing the volume in the multime-
dia system
X
Slide 6 the controller in the Bluetooth
®
audio basic display (Y page 153).
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Volume: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears. The # dot indicates the cur-
rent setting.
X
Select Standard or Boost.
i
If play back on the Bluetooth
®
audio player
is too quiet, the Boost
function may be used.
It is recommended, however, that you
increase the volume on the Bluetooth
®
audio
player directly.
Reconnecting a Bluetooth
®
audio
device
General notes
The Bluetooth
®
audio profiles are connected
automatically under the following circumstan-
ces:
R
one of the last two mobile phones to have
been connected has also been used as a Blue-
tooth
®
audio player (if this function is sup-
ported by the mobile phone).
R
the mobile phone is automatically connected.
The Bluetooth
®
audio player is then connec-
ted.
i
For an automatic connection with the mul-
timedia system, the mobile phone must be
within range.
For most Bluetooth
®
audio devices, the "auto-
matic connection" must be activated by tick-
ing a box. Depending on the device used, this
prompt often occurs during authorization (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Connecting Bluetooth
®
audio devices
If the No Bluetooth Audio Device Connec‐
ted message appears, you have two options to
reconnect the Bluetooth
®
audio device.
Option 1:
X
To confirm the Connect Last Used Player
message in the basic display: press the con-
troller.
If the multimedia system can locate the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device, it will be connected and
start playing.
Option 2:
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Bluetooth Audio Devices: press
the controller.
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device: turn and
press the controller.
If the Bluetooth
®
audio device has been
authorized, playback starts.
156
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
Media
Bluetooth
®
audio device and simulta-
neous search for mobile phones
i
When searching for a mobile phone or a new
Bluetooth
®
audio device, the connection to an
already activated Bluetooth
®
audio device is
separated (
Y page 93).
In the Bluetooth
®
audio basic display, you will
see the No Bluetooth Audio Device Con‐
nected message, and the displayed Connect
Last Used Player message cannot be selec-
ted.
De-authorizing (deregistering) a Blue-
tooth
®
audio device
X
To select a Bluetooth
®
audio device from the
Bluetooth
®
device list: turn the controller
(
Y page 154).
X
To select G: slide 9 and press the con-
troller.
X
To select Deauthorize: press the controller.
A prompt appears asking whether you really
wish to de-authorize this device.
X
To select Yes: turn and press the controller.
The device is deleted from the Bluetooth
®
device list.
i
Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth
®
audio
device, you should also delete the device
name MB Bluetooth
from your Bluetooth
®
audio device's Bluetooth
®
list (see the Blue-
tooth
®
audio device's operating instructions).
Operation with the Media Interface
General notes
Media Interface is a universal interface for the
connection of mobile audio and video devices.
Media Interface in the multimedia system has
two USB connections.
The USB ports are located in the stowage com-
partment under the armrest (
Y page 143).
Media Interface basic display
:
Main function bar
;
Display for the active data medium
=
Media menu bar
?
Title display in the media list
A
Current track and number in the track list
B
Numerical time display
C
Graphic time display
D
Additional display area with cover view
Switching to Media Interface
X
Connect the data medium to USB port 1 or
USB port 2 (
Y page 148).
X
Select the basic menu for Media Interface 1 or
Media Interface 2 (
Y page 144).
If playable media files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
If you remove a device, the No Device Con‐
nected message appears.
Supported devices
The following data media can be connected to
the multimedia system via Media Interface:
R
iPod
®
R
iPhone
®
R
iPad
®
R
MP3
R
USB devices
i
iPod
®
, iPhone
®
and iPad
®
are registered
trademarks of Apple Inc., Cupertino, Califor-
nia, USA.
For details and a list of supported devices, visit
our website at
http://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/.
Operation with the Media Interface
157
Media
Z
Then follow the instructions in the "Media Inter-
face" section.
Or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer
Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).
Supported data formats
Music MP3, WMA, AAC
Video MPEG, WMV, MOV,
AVI, MP4
Images JPG, JPEG, BMP, PNG
i
Video files from Apple
®
devices cannot be
played.
Selecting a music file
Selecting with the controller
X
To display the current track list: press the
controller in the basic display.
X
Select Current Tracklist.
The track list for the active data medium
appears.
X
To select a track: turn the controller and press
to confirm.
X
To skip forward or back to a track: turn the
controller in the basic display.
The selected track is played.
Fast forward/rewind
X
With the media source active in the basic dis-
play, slide 1 the controller and hold it
until the desired position has been reached.
Searching for a track
Selecting Search using media menu bar
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar appears.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
Selecting a category
The following categories are listed:
R
Current Tracklist
R
Folder
R
Select By Cover
R
Keyword Search
R
Playlists
R
Artists
R
Albums
R
Tracks
R
Genres
R
Year
R
Composers
R
Videos
R
Photos
R
Audiobooks
R
Podcasts
R
iTunes U
i
The functions are available as soon as the
entire media content has been read and ana-
lyzed.
If the same device is reconnected with
unchanged media content, these functions
are available more quickly.
The audio books, podcasts and iTunes U
®
categories are only available for Apple
®
devi-
ces.
When connecting Apple
®
devices, the cate-
gories “Folder”, “Year”, "Videos" and “Pho-
tos” are not available.
X
To select a category, e.g. Current Track‐
list: turn and press the controller.
A selection list appears.
X
Select the required track.
X
Keyword search: using the controller, enter
the characters for the desired search term
and confirm (
Y page 152).
Search results are sorted according to the
available categories, displayed and can then
be selected.
158
Operation with the Media Interface
Media
Selecting the playback option
X
In media mode, slide 6 the controller.
The media menu bar is shown.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select the playback option (Y page 148)
i
The Play More Like This option is also
available for Apple
®
devices. For this, the
Genius functionality must be activated in
iTunes
®
. Then synchronization of the Apple
®
device with iTunes
®
must be carried out
again.
Selecting video settings
Video files from Apple
®
devices cannot be
played.
If playable video files are found, they will be
played by the multimedia system.
X
To switch on full-screen mode: press the con-
troller in the basic display.
X
To show the video menu: slide 6 the con-
troller in full-screen mode.
The Media Interface menu bar appears.
X
To select Options: turn and press the con-
troller.
X
Select Video Settings.
Making settings (Y page 161)
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Handling discs while driving may distract you
from traffic conditions. You could also lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Handle discs only when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h) your vehicle covers a
distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every
second.
General notes
Notes on discs
!
Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
They could peel off and damage the drive.
The drive is designed to receive EN
60908 standard discs. Therefore, you can
only use discs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm.
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that con-
tain data on both sides (DVD on one side and
audio data on the other), they cannot be ejec-
ted and can damage the drive.
Do not use discs with an 8 cm diameter, even
when using an adapter. Only use round discs
with a 12 cm diameter.
The variety of discs, burners and burn software
available means there is no guarantee that the
multimedia system will be able to play discs that
you have burned yourself.
DVD playback conditions
The multimedia system can play back video
DVDs produced according to the following
standards:
R
Region code 1 or region code 0 (no region
code)
R
PAL or NTSC standard
Video DVD mode
159
Media
Z
You will generally find the relevant details either
on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.
With DVDs that do not meet the standard
requirements, you may encounter playback
problems.
i Observe the following notes:
R
The multimedia system is set to region
code 1 at the factory. This setting can be
changed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. The region code can be changed up
to five times.
R
If the region code is changed at the work-
shop, video DVDs with another region code
can also be played. If you insert a video
DVD with a different region code, a mes-
sage to this effect appears.
R
If a DVD cannot be played back according
to national color transfer methods (PAL or
NTSC standards), problems with the image,
sound or playback may occur.
Control options
There are various control menus available in
DVD video mode.
Most DVDs have their own control menu.
The DVD's control menu is operated directly
using the controller or DVD functions.
Control menu and
function
Operation
R
DVD's control
menu
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
Operation with the
controller
R
MenuOptions
Selection of bright-
ness, contrast,
color, format
Operation using the
menu bar Options
,
video settings
R
Video menu
Selection of scene,
fast forward or
rewind
In full-screen mode,
slide 6 the control-
ler
R
DVD functions
Selection of title,
scene, language,
subtitles ...
In full-screen mode,
press the controller
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, certain functions or
actions may not function at all. The symbol K
appears in the display.
Switching on video DVD mode
R
Insert and eject a disc from the single drive
(
Y page 146)
R
Insert a disc into the DVD changer
(
Y page 147)
Further options for switching on:
R
Using the number keypad (Y page 144)
R
Using the main function bar (Y page 143)
R
Using the device list (Y page 144)
R
Using the Õ button (Y page 143)
Showing the DVD basic display
:
Main function bar
;
Main display field
=
Media menu bar
The DVD basic display can be shown in the fol-
lowing situations:
X
To show the DVD menu: press the %
button.
X
To show in the video DVD currently play-
ing: slide 6 the controller.
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The basic display appears.
160
Video DVD mode
Media
Switching on DVD full-screen mode
It is possible to switch from the DVD basic dis-
play to full screen mode as follows:
X
Slide 5 the controller.
The main function bar and menu bar are hid-
den. A full-screen symbol will be shown.
X
Press the controller.
The full-screen mode appears.
Calling up the options menu
X
To select options: in full-screen mode, slide
6 the controller.
The video menu appears.
X
Press the controller.
The DVD basic display appears.
X
To select Options in the menu bar: turn and
press the controller.
The Options
menu appears.
DVD functions
X
To select DVD Functions: turn and press the
controller.
A menu appears (
Y page 162).
Selecting video settings
Setting the picture format
The following options are available for the
screen format for the DVD being played:
R
Auto
R
16:9
R
4:3
R
Zoom
X
To set the picture format: turn and press
the controller.
The dot before the menu entry shows the
selected format.
Manual image enhancement
X
To select Brightness , Contrast or
Color
: turn and press the controller.
A sliding menu appears.
X
To select the required value: turn the control-
ler.
X
To exit the sliding menu: slide 8 the con-
troller.
Showing the DVD's control menu
Most DVDs have their own control menu which
can be operated using the controller.
Showing the DVD's control menu
X
To show the DVD overlay menu: in full-screen
video mode, press the controller.
The DVD overlay menu is shown.
X
To select Menu from the DVD overlay menu:
turn and press the controller.
The menu of the DVD overlay menu is hidden
and the DVD's menu entries (e.g. scenes, lan-
guage, trailers) are displayed.
X
To select a menu entry: slide and press the
controller.
Video DVD mode
161
Media
Z
Operating the video menu
:
Type of data medium
;
Current title
=
Shows the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-
play
?
Current scene
A
Track time
Operating the video menu
X
To show: in full-screen video mode, slide 6
the controller.
X
To hide: slide 5 the controller.
X
To select the next or previous scene: turn the
controller clockwise/counter-clockwise.
X
To fast forward or rewind: slide 1 the
controller and hold until the desired position
has been reached.
X
To hide the video menu: slide 5 the con-
troller.
X
To show the menu bars for the DVD basic dis-
play: press the controller.
The video menu is hidden and the DVD basic
menu appears.
DVD functions
Showing/hiding the DVD functions
X
To show the DVD overlay menu: in full-screen
video mode, press the controller.
The DVD overlay menu is shown.
X
To hide: select % in the DVD overlay
menu.
X
To show the DVD basic display: select ò
in the DVD overlay menu.
Overview of DVD overlay menu
:
Activates DVD control menu
;
Hides DVD overlay menu
=
Shows the DVD basic display
?
Confirms entry in control menu
A
Navigates DVD lists
B
Jumps to the start of the scene
C
Displays camera perspectives
D
Shows subtitles
E
Selects language
F
Stop function
G
Pause function
Operating the DVD's own menu with the
DVD overlay menu
X
In full-screen mode, press the controller
The DVD overlay menu is shown.
It is possible to navigate within the DVD's own
control menu using the arrows in the upper
bar of the DVD overlay menu.
X
To select the XZ¬Y arrow to navigate in the
DVD's own menu: turn the controller.
The active arrow is highlighted.
X
To select the arrow: press the controller.
The next menu entry in the direction of the
arrow is highlighted.
X
To select ¬ from the DVD overlay menu:
turn and press the controller.
The selected DVD scene is played.
X
To hide the DVD overlay menu: select &
using the controller.
X
Press the controller.
The DVD overlay menu is hidden.
If functions such as Display camera perspec-
tives are available on the DVD, these functions
are shown in the DVD overlay menu.
X
To call up Display camera perspectives: turn
and press the controller
162
Video DVD mode
Media
Stops playback
X
In full-screen mode, press the controller
The DVD overlay menu is shown.
X
Interrupting playback
To select É in the menu of the DVD overlay
menu: turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The video
image is hidden.
X
To continue playback: select Ì.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X
To stop playback: select É again while
playback is paused.
X
To start playback again: select Ì.
Playback restarts from the beginning.
Pausing playback
X
In full-screen mode, press the controller
The DVD overlay menu is shown.
X
To pause playback
Select Ë: turn and press the controller.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: select Ì.
Selecting a scene/chapter
If the film is divided into scenes and chapters,
you can select these directly while the film is
running or you can skip progressively through
them. This is not possible at certain points for
some DVDs (e.g. during the opening credits).
It may also be possible to select the scene and
chapter from the functions stored on the DVD.
X
To skip forward or back: in the video menu,
turn the controller.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The next or previous scene in the film is skip-
ped to.
Picture viewer
General notes
If pictures are stored on a connected medium
(except on Apple
®
devices), you can view these
on the multimedia system.
The following data media and picture formats
are supported:
R
Data media: CD, DVD, USB devices, SD cards
R
Picture formats: jpeg, jpg, bmp, png
The maximum image resolution is
20 megapixels for JPEG, JPG and 1.5 megapixels
for BMP, PNG.
Displaying pictures
X
In the media basic display, press the control-
ler.
X
To select Search: turn and press the control-
ler.
The category list appears.
X
To select Photos: turn and press the control-
ler.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
If there is no picture on the data medium, an
empty list is shown.
Searching for pictures on other data media
X
You can search for pictures on other data
media.
In the directory list, slide 8 the controller.
The device list appears.
X
To select a data medium with picture files:
turn the controller and press to confirm.
A directory list appears. Folders and picture
files can be shown.
X
Select a folder or picture.
Starting a slide show
X
While viewing a picture, press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Start Slideshow: turn and press
the controller.
The slide show starts.
X
To end the slide show: press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
Select End Slide Show.
Picture viewer
163
Media
Z
Changing the picture view
X
Press the controller.
The image menu appears.
X
To select Turn Clockwise: turn and press
the controller.
The picture rotates 90 degrees.
X
Select Turn Counterclockwise.
The picture rotates 90 degrees.
X
Select Zoom In.
The size of the picture increases.
After you have zoomed into the picture, you
can move the section of the picture.
X
To move the section of the picture: slide 4
and 1 the controller.
X
To revert to the original size: press the con-
troller.
or
X
Press the % button.
Closing the picture viewer
X
Press the controller.
X
To select Close Picture Viewer: turn and
press the controller.
The multimedia system returns to the last
accessed media function.
164
Picture viewer
Media
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Sound settings
Calling up the sound menu
You can select various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. It is possible
to set more bass for radio mode than for audio
CD mode, for example. The respective sound
menu can be called up from the menu of the
desired mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 134).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 143).
X
To display the menu bars: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer
.
Sound menu overview
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Adjusts the volume:
right/left and
front/rear
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 165).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is brought
to the front.
X
To activate rotary menus for treble, mid-range
and bass: slide 6 the controller.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
Rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader
adjusts the volume in front and rear.
For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 165).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is
brought to the front and then slide 6 the
controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
Sound settings
165
Sound
X
To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 the
controller.
X
To adjust the fader: slide 6 or 5 the con-
troller.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Harman/Kardon
®
Logic 7
®
surround
sound system
General notes
The harman/kardon
®
Logic7
®
surround sound
system is available for all functions in the radio
and media modes.
The harman/kardon
®
Logic7
®
surround sound
system is available for the following operating
modes:
R
Radio (FM only)
R
Satellite radio
R
Audio CD
R
MP3 (including SD card and USB storage
device)
R
Media Interface
R
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
R
Video DVD (PCM, DTS
®
and Dolby
®
Digital
audio formats)
i
For the best sound, CD or WAV CD format is
recommended. For data-reduced media, AAC
with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is recommen-
ded.
Discs which support the audio formats men-
tioned have the following logos:
i
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
i
For DTS patents see
http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited.
DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS
Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Calling up the sound menu
You can select various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. It is possible
to set more bass for radio mode than for CD
audio mode, for example. The respective sound
menu is called up from the menu of the desired
mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 134).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 143).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer
.
Overview of harman/kardon
®
Logic7
®
surround
sound system
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Adjusts the volume:
right/left and
front/rear
Logic 7 Optimizes the sound
playback
166
Harman/Kardon
®
Logic 7
®
surround sound system
Sound
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 166).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
X
To activate rotary menus for treble, mid-range
and bass: slide 6 the controller.
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
The rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader
adjusts the volume in front and rear.
For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 166).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in
the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance: slide 8 or 9 the
controller.
X
To adjust the fader: slide 6 or 5 the con-
troller.
An image shows the sound focus set.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
Setting surround sound
The Logic7 setting optimizes the sound play-
back.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 166).
X
Turn the controller until Logic7 is in the cen-
ter.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The left-hand rotary menu to switch surround
sound on and off is activated.
X
To switch Logic7 on or off: turn the control-
ler.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button briefly.
For the optimum audio experience for all pas-
sengers when Logic7
®
is switched on, the bal-
ance settings should be set to the center of the
vehicle interior.
MP3 tracks should have a data transfer rate of at
least 128 kbit/s.
Surround sound playback does not function for
mono signal sources, such as for AM radio
mode.
If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel, you
should switch off Logic7
®
, since it may other-
wise switch dynamically between stereo and
mono and cause temporary sound distortions.
Harman/Kardon
®
Logic 7
®
surround sound system
167
Sound
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound
General notes
The Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound sys-
tem is available for all functions in the radio and
media modes.
The following modes are available for the Bang &
Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound system:
R
Radio (FM only)
R
Satellite radio
R
Audio CD
R
MP3/AAC
R
Media Interface
R
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
R
Video DVD (PCM, DTS
®
and Dolby
®
Digital
audio formats)
i
For the best sound, CD or WAV CD format is
recommended. For data-reduced media, AAC
with a data rate of 320 kbit/s is recommen-
ded.
i
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
i
For DTS patents see
http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing Limited.
DTS, the Symbol & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS
Digital Surround is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Calling up the sound menu
You can select various sound settings for the
different audio and video sources. It is possible
to set more bass for radio mode than for audio
CD mode, for example. The respective sound
menu is called up from the menu of the desired
mode.
X
Switch to radio mode (Y page 134).
or
X
Switch to media mode (Y page 143).
X
To switch to the menu bar: slide 6 the con-
troller.
X
To select à: turn and press the controller.
The menu appears with the last setting
accessed, e.g. Equalizer
.
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound AMG sound system
Function Options
Equalizer Sets treble, mid-
range and bass
Balance/fader Adjusts the volume:
right/left and
front/rear
True Image™ Sets a sound profile
in the vehicle
Sound mode (VIP &
BAL Selection)
Optimizes the sound
playback
Setting treble, mid-range and bass
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 168).
X
Turn the controller until Equalizer is in the
center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
Rotary menus for treble, mid-range and bass
are activated.
168
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound
Sound
X
To switch between the rotary menus: slide
8 or 9 the controller.
X
To make the desired Equalizer settings: turn
the controller.
The rotary menus show the set values.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button.
Adjusting the balance/fader
Balance adjusts the volume left and right. Fader
adjusts the volume in front and rear.
For the best sound, setting 0 is recommended.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 168).
X
Turn the controller until Balance/Fader is in
the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
To activate the menu for balance and fader:
press the controller.
X
To adjust the balance focus: slide 8 or
9 the controller.
X
To adjust the fader focus: slide 6 or 5 the
controller.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button.
Setting the sound profile
With the Sound Profile setting, you can select
between two defined sound settings.
Sound profiles Description
Reference High-end sound set-
ting for faithful audio
playback
Surround Optimum setting for
LIVE and concert
recordings
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 168).
X
Turn the controller until Sound Profile is in
the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menu to select the sound profile is
activated.
X
To select Sound Profile: turn the controller
until the desired sound profile is activated.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button.
Sound playback for individual seats
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound
169
Sound
For the best sound, the specific seats will need
to be set.
X
Call up the sound menu (Y page 168).
X
Turn the controller until VIP & BAL Selec‐
tion is in the center.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The rotary menu is activated.
X
To set the desired VIP & BAL Selection:
turn the controller.
The segment, text and image show the selec-
ted setting.
X
To return to the menu: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
To return to the basic menu: press the %
button.
170
Bang & Olufsen BeoSound
Sound
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Weather forecasts
Introduction
This function is currently not available for Can-
ada.
For the reception of weather forecasts via sat-
ellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM Satellite
Weather subscription.
If the message: Please call SIRIUS to
activate the system at: 888-539-7474
ESN: SIRIUS ID appears along with the ID
number of the SIRIUS device, you will need to
have the weather service activated first.
X
To select Call or Cancel: turn and press the
controller.
If a mobile phone is connected to the multi-
media system (
Y page 92), when you select
Call
, a call is placed to a member of the SIR-
IUS service staff. The ID number of the SIRIUS
device will be transferred to the telephone
display.
X
This will be followed by instructions from the
service employee.
The multimedia system can receive weather
forecasts for the USA (including Alaska and
Hawaii) via satellite radio.
The received weather data can be displayed as
an information chart (daily forecast, five-day
forecast, detailed information) or on the
weather map.
The weather data received from the weather
station is stored for one hour in the multimedia
system. It can therefore be displayed again
immediately after restarting the engine (for
example after refueling).
Depending on which scale has been selected,
the weather map can display the following
weather data with symbols:
R
precipitation radar
The precipitation radar cannot be displayed
for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.
R
storm characteristics
R
high and low-pressure areas, weather fronts
R
course of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,
typhoons)
R
storm warnings
R
wind direction and speeds
i
Hurricane: term used to describe the tropi-
cal cyclones that p
rimarily develop in the
Atlantic, North Pacific and South Pacific
oceans. The wind speeds are above 74 mph
(118 km/h). Five categories are used to clas-
sify the strength of a hurricane.
Typhoon: term used to describe a tropical
cyclone that develops in the northwestern
Pacific. The wind speeds are in the category of
a hurricane.
Switching the SIRIUS Weather display
on/off
Activating
X
Press the % button.
X
To select Tel/® in the main function bar:
slide 5, turn and press the controller.
A menu appears.
X
To select SIRIUS Weather: turn and press
the controller.
The information chart shows the daily fore-
cast at the current vehicle position.
Weather forecasts
171
SIRIUS Weather
You see the following information:
R
the date and time of the weather message
received last
R
information on the current weather (temper-
ature, cloud coverage) and a forecast for the
next three, six and twelve hours
R
the current highest temperature and fore-
casts
R
the current lowest temperature and forecasts
R
the probability of rain
X
To switch to the 5-day forecast: select
Current
.
A menu appears.
X
Select 5-Day.
The information chart displays the forecast
for the next five days in the currently selected
location.
X
To return to the current-day forecast:
select 5-Day
.
A menu appears.
X
Select Current.
The information chart shows the forecast for
the current day again.
Deactivating
X
Press %.
Displaying detailed information
Besides the current temperatures, you can dis-
play information such as wind speeds and UV
index.
X
To select Current or 5-Day in the current-day
or 5-day forecast: turn and press the control-
ler.
A menu appears.
X
Select Info.
The information chart shows detailed infor-
mation for the selected area.
Selecting the area for the weather
forecast
Introduction
You can select the weather forecasts for:
R
the current vehicle position
R
the vicinity of the destination
R
a winter sports area
R
an area within the USA
You can select a location in the information
chart (option 1) or in the map (option 2). You can
store frequently selected locations in the mem-
ory (
Y page 174).
i
The multimedia system receives data for the
weather forecasts from the nearest weather
station to the selected location.
172
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
Option 1: selecting the area in the infor-
mation chart
X
To select Location in the information chart:
turn and press the controller.
X
To select the current vehicle position:
select Current Position
in the menu.
The multimedia system receives weather data
for the current vehicle position from the near-
est weather station and automatically dis-
plays the data.
Requirement for "Near destination": a route to a
destination has been calculated (
Y page 58).
The menu item is otherwise grayed out.
X
To select the vicinity of the destination:
select Near
Destination: turn and press the
controller.
X
To select a winter sports area: select At
Ski Area from the menu: turn the controller
and press to confirm.
X
Select a state.
X
Select a winter sports area from the menu.
The weather data and other information is
displayed for the winter sports area that has
been selected. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
The information chart shows the following infor-
mation (if available):
R
ski slopes/ski lifts
R
snowboarding and nighttime opening
R
snow conditions (e.g. snow depth)
R
temperature
The status of a facility is indicated as follows:
R
green check mark - open
R
red cross - closed
R
question mark - not known
Example: city list with character bar
Entry limitation: searching for a location using
the character bar is not possible while driving.
X
To search for a location: select Search
Areas: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Other States (U.S.) or Current
State/Province (ABC).
Depending on the selection, the list of states
or cities will appear with the character bar.
You can limit the search using the character
bar.
X
To select state/province or city: enter the
first few letters by turning and pressing the
controller.
X
To switch to the list without the character bar:
slide 5 the controller or select ¬.
X
To delete an entry: select 2 in the char-
acter bar and press the controller.
Pressing briefly deletes the last letter
entered.
Pressing and holding longer deletes the entire
entry.
X
To select the state/province or city from the
list: turn and press the controller.
After selecting a state (or province) the list of
locations appears.
After selecting a location, the information
chart displays the weather forecast for the
Weather forecasts
173
SIRIUS Weather
selected location. The data is supplied by the
nearest weather station.
Option 2: selecting the area in the
weather map
X
Call up the weather map (Y page 174).
X
Move the weather map so that the crosshair is
over the desired area (
Y page 174).
X
Press the controller.
The information chart shows the weather
forecast for the selected area. The data is
supplied by the nearest weather station.
Memory functions
Storing the area in the weather memory
You can save locations that are called up fre-
quently in ten preset positions (0, 1-9) in the
weather memory.
X
In the weather memory: select the area for
the weather forecast (
Y page 172).
The selected location appears at the top in the
status bar.
X
To select Location in the information chart:
turn and press the controller.
X
Select Preset.
X
Select a preset using the controller.
X
Press and hold the controller until you hear a
tone.
The area is entered on the selected preset.
X
To store rapidly: in the daily forecast
(
Y page 171) press and hold a number key,
e.g. l, until the preset position number is
shown in the status bar in front of the area
name.
i
You can also use this function in the five-day
forecast (
Y page 171), and in the detailed
information view (
Y page 172).
Selecting an area from the weather
memory
X
Directly from the weather memory: select
Location
from the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
X
Select Preset.
X
Select the memory position which contains
the location you require.
The weather data for the selected area is dis-
played.
X
Quick select: if a location is stored in the
weather memory, for example when the cur-
rent forecast display is active, briefly press a
number key, e.g. l.
The weather data for the selected area is dis-
played.
Weather map
Calling up the weather map
X
To select Map in the information chart: turn
and press the controller.
The weather map is shown on a 500-mi (500-
km) scale. The crosshair highlights the
weather station that supplies the current
weather data.
Moving the weather map
X
Slide 4 or 1 the controller.
The weather map moves in the corresponding
direction under the crosshair.
Changing the scale
X
Turn the controller.
The scale bar appears.
X
Turn until the desired scale is set.
Showing/hiding the menu in the
weather map
X
To show: press the controller.
X
To hide: slide 5 the controller.
174
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
Selecting a weather station in the map
X
Move the weather map and crosshair to the
desired position (
Y page 174).
X
To show the menu: press the controller.
X
To select Weather Table: press the control-
ler.
The multimedia system receives weather data
for the selected position from the nearest
weather station and displays the data as a
current-day forecast.
Switching layers on the map on/off
You can switch on different layers, for example
to display the rain radar, weather fronts and the
course of tropical storms on the map.
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 174).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select a layer.
Switch the display on O or off ª.
Explanation of the layers on the
weather map
R
Menu item Radar Map
Displays the precipitation radar as a color
area in all map scales. For an explanation of
the colors, see the legend (
Y page 177).
R
Menu item Storm Characteristics
Displays the characteristics of a storm in all
map scales:
-
tornadic storm:
storm cell with strong winds (super cell),
from which a tornado can develop. Torna-
does are also known as twisters.
-
cyclone:
storm cells from which a tornadic storm
can develop
-
hailstorm
-
the likelihood of a hailstorm
R
Storm watch areas
Shows areas for which storm advisories have
been issued (red areas). It is shown in map
scales 50 mi (50 km), 200 mi (200 km) and
500 mi (500 km).
R
Menu item Atmospheric Pressure
Shows the position of high and low-pressure
areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars It is
shown in map scales 200 mi (200 km) and
500 mi (500 km).
R
Menu item Tropical Storm Tracking
shows the direction and speed of propagation
of a tropical storm as a track in all map scales.
Information on times and strength is also
given.
R
Menu item Winds
Shows the wind direction and wind speed in
map scale of 5 mi (5 km).
Sample displays of weather data in the
map
X
To display the precipitation radar: activate
the Radar Map
display level (Y page 175).
The precipitation radar is displayed if weather
data is available.
i
You can call up the legend for the precipita-
tion radar (
Y page 177).
The transparency of the precipitation radar
display level can be adjusted in five stages.
X
To display the storm characteristics: acti-
vate the Storm Characteristics
display
level (
Y page 175).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display the storm characteristics.
Weather forecasts
175
SIRIUS Weather
You can call up the legend for storms
(
Y page 177).
The following information on a storm cell is
displayed (if available):
R
characteristics of the storm cell
R
date and time of observation (time stamp)
R
directional movement speed and path
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell is advancing.
X
To display the weather fronts: activate the
Atmospheric Pressure
display level
(
Y page 175).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display the weather fronts.
The example shows the position of high and
low-pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and
isobars. Isobars are lines that show where the
air pressure is the same.
Legend: weather fronts
Weather
front
Explanation
Cold front
(blue line with
blue triangles)
If a cold front moves in, the
weather remains changeable
and there are often rain
showers and thunderstorms.
The air temperature decrea-
ses.
Warm front
(red line with
red semi-cir-
cles)
A warm front may cause
more prolonged steady rain,
more cloud cover and a slow
rise in temperature.
Weather
front
Explanation
Stationary
front
(red and blue
line with red
semi-circles
and blue trian-
gles)
The weather front moves
minimally. The weather
remains changeable in this
area.
Occlusion
(purple line
with purple
semi-circles
and triangles)
When the faster cold front
catches up and joins the
warm front ahead of it, an
occluded front is formed. The
weather remains changeable
and rainy within an occlu-
sion.
X
To display the track of a storm: activate the
Tropical Storm Tracking
display level
(
Y page 175).
If weather data is available, the weather map
will then display storm tracking information.
Example: in the middle of the map you can see
the current position of the tropical low-pres-
sure area (cyclone). To the right of this a solid
line shows the previous path with positions
and times. The forecast for the direction of
propagation is shown by a dotted line with
positions and times.
176
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
You can find out more information about cyclo-
nes in the Storm Guide (
Y page 178).
The following information is shown (if available):
R
name of the tropical storm and category
R
time stamp
R
directional movement speed and path
R
maximum wind speed
Propagation speed: the speed at which the
storm cell of a tropical cyclone is advancing.
A tropical storm is categorized according to
where it originated.
Region of origin category
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical low-
pressure system (Trop‐
ical Low Press.
Sys.)
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Storm)
Atlantic, North
and South Pacific
Oceans
Name of tropical storm
(Hurricane Category
3)
Displays hurricane cate-
gories 1 through 5
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Low
Press. Sys.)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Tropical Cyclone)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Typhoon)
Northwestern
Pacific Ocean
Name of tropical storm
(Super-Typhoon)
You can also see the time stamp for the weather
data on map scales of 50 miles and smaller.
The weather map shows wind directions and
wind speeds.
Legend (precipitation radar and storms)
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 174).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Legend.
i
The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid
for a cyclone (mesocyclone).
Precipita-
tion type
Color scale
Rain
Eleven shades from light to
heavy (light green to red)
Mixed
Shades from light to heavy
(light purple to purple)
Snow
Shades from light to heavy
(light turquoise to turquoise)
Time stamp
The time stamp shows when the weather data
was created by the weather station.
A time stamp corresponds to the time at the
vehicle's current position. The changeover from
summer time to standard time is performed
automatically.
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 174).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
X
Select Time Stamp.
Changing to the information chart
X
Display the menu on the weather map
(
Y page 174).
X
To select Weather Table: turn and press the
controller.
Weather forecasts
177
SIRIUS Weather
Storm Watch Box
Storm watch areas for which there are storm
advisories are displayed as red areas on the
weather map.
X
To activate/deactivate the storm watch
area display on the map: display the menu
on the weather map (
Y page 174).
X
To select View: turn and press the controller.
The list of display levels appears.
X
Select Storm Watch.
X
Select Show Symbols for Storm Areas
On Map.
Storm watch areas are displayed O or are
not displayed ª on the map.
X
To activate/deactivate the automatic dis-
play of storm advisories: select Display
Storm Watch Automatically.
Storm advisories are automatically displayed
O or not displayed ª on the map.
X
To set the radius for storm advisories:
select 5 Miles
, 50 Miles or 200 Miles.
Storm Guide
X
To display the storm guide: display the
menu on the weather map (
Y page 174).
X
To select Guide: turn and press the controller.
A menu appears. The current storm is high-
lighted. There is information about the storm
in the status bar.
X
To select Next: turn and press the controller.
The next storm is marked.
X
Select Previous.
The previous storm is highlighted.
X
To display storm details: select Details.
You see detailed information about the selec-
ted storm.
178
Weather forecasts
SIRIUS Weather
Your multimedia system equipment
These operating instructions describe all the
standard and optional equipment of your multi-
media system, as available at the time of going
to press. Country-specific differences are pos-
sible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions.
Read the information on qualified specialist
workshops in the vehicle Operator's Manual.
Overview
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If objects such as headphones/headsets or
external audio/video sources are not secured
in the passenger compartment, they can be
flung around and hit vehicle occupants. There
is a risk of injury, for example in the event of
sudden braking or a sudden change in direc-
tion.
Always stow these items or similar objects
carefully so that they cannot be flung around,
for example in a lockable vehicle stowage
compartment.
Equipment
Observe that a range of Rear Seat Entertain-
ment Systems are available for Mercedes-Benz
vehicles. In this Operator's Manual, the Rear
Seat Entertainment System Code 864 is used
for illustration purposes. If you have a different
Rear Seat Entertainment System in your vehicle,
please refer to the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
Components
The Rear Seat Entertainment System includes:
R
two screens for the rear behind the front-seat
head restraints
R
two remote controls
R
a single drive (rear-compartment drive)
R
AUX jacks on both rear screens (AUX display)
R
AUX jacks on the rear drive (AUX drive)
R
headphones for each rear screen
R
two sets of cordless headphones
Rear-compartment screens
:
AUX jacks (AUX display)
;
Display
Overview
179
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
The same AUX jacks (AUX drive) can be found in the rear-compartment drive (Y page 181).
Remote control
Overview
:
Switches the screen on or off
;
Switches the button illumination on/off
=
Selects the screen for the remote control
?
Selects a menu item
A
Confirms a selection or setting
B
Switches the mute function on/off
C
Adjusts the volume
D
Skips, fast-forward and fast-rewind
E
Selects a track; direct entry
F
Exits a menu (back)
i
Two remote controls are supplied for the US
and Canadian markets.
Selecting the screen for the remote con-
trol
You can use the remote control to operate either
of the two rear screens. To do so, the appropri-
ate rear screen must be selected.
X
To select the left-hand screen: turn thumb-
wheel = until L REAR (
Y page 180) is high-
lighted in the window.
X
To select the right-hand screen: turn
thumbwheel = until REAR R is highlighted in
the window.
Switching the screen on/off
The switched-on rear compartment screens
switch off after 30 minutes if:
R
the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position
0 or 1 (see vehicle Operator's Manual)
R
the SmartKey is not inserted
Before the screens switch off, they show a mes-
sage to this effect.
You can switch the screens back on. However,
this will discharge the starter battery.
X
Point the remote control at the rear-compart-
ment screen which has been selected for
remote operation.
X
Press button : on the remote control
(
Y page 180).
The rear screen switches on or off.
Switching the button lighting on/off
X
Press button ; on the remote control
(
Y page 180).
Depending on the previous status, the button
lighting is switched on or off.
i
If you do not use the remote control for
about 15 seconds, the button lighting
switches off automatically.
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press button B on the remote control
(
Y page 180).
The sound is switched on/off.
Selecting a menu/menu item and con-
firming your selection
X
Select a menu item using the =;
9: buttons on the remote control and
press the 9 button to confirm.
180
Overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks
:
Disc slot
;
AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal
(red)
=
AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal
(white)
?
AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)
A
Disc eject button
The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.
Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand
side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX dis-
play) (
Y page 179).
Cordless headphones
Overview
X
To adjust the headphones: open both sides of the headphones.
X
Adjust the headphones by pulling the headphone band in the direction of the arrow.
X
To switch the headphones on or off: press On or Off switch ;.
X
To adjust the volume: turn volume control = until the desired volume is set. If you have con-
nected corded headphones to a rear-compartment screen, you can adjust the volume using the
remote control (
Y page 180).
X
To check the battery condition of charge: check the state of the batteries using indicator
lamp : (
Y page 182).
The headphones automatically switch off if they have not received an audio signal for approximately
three minutes. This preserves the batteries.
Overview
181
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Indicator lamp on the cordless head-
phones
The color of the indicator lamp shows:
R
whether the device is switched on or off
R
the condition of the inserted batteries
LED dis-
play
Status
Green The batteries are fine.
Red The batteries are almost dis-
charged.
Lit continu-
ously
The headphones are switched
on and connected to a screen.
Flashing The headphones are searching
for the connection to a screen.
No display
(dark)
The headphones are switched
off or the batteries are dis-
charged.
The function of the headphones may be
impaired by other radio-based electronic devi-
ces such as mobile phones or laptops.
Selecting the screen for the cordless
headphones
X
Slide switch : to L (left-hand screen) or R
(right-hand screen).
Connecting additional headphones
Up to two cordless headphones can be used at
the same time for each screen.
You can also connect one additional set of cor-
ded headphones to each of the two rear-com-
partment screens (
Y page 179). The socket is
designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo
jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohms.
Replacing batteries
Notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
Batteries are required for the remote control
and for the two sets of cordless headphones.
X
Switch to the remote control (Y page 183).
X
Switch to cordless headphones
(
Y page 183).
182
Overview
Rear Seat Entertainment System
On the remote control
:
Battery compartment
;
Catch tab
=
Battery compartment cover
?
Retaining lugs
A
Batteries
The remote control contains two type AAA, 1.5 V
batteries.
X
To open the battery compartment: remove
battery compartment cover = on the back of
the remote control.
X
To do so, press down retaining lug ; and
take off battery compartment cover =.
X
Remove discharged batteries A from the
tray.
X
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity
markings on the batteries and battery com-
partment when doing so.
Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must
face upwards.
Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+) must
face downwards.
X
To close the battery compartment: insert
battery compartment cover = starting with
retaining lugs ? into the battery compart-
ment and allow catch tab ; to engage in
place.
On the cordless headphones
The battery compartment is located on the left
headphone. The cordless headphones require
two type AAA, 1.5 V batteries.
X
To open the battery compartment: turn
battery compartment cover : counter-
clockwise and remove.
X
Remove the discharged batteries from the
tray.
X
Insert the new batteries. Observe the polarity
markings on the batteries and battery tray
when doing so.
X
To close the battery compartment: replace
battery housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise until it engages.
If the batteries have been inserted correctly,
the indicator lamp will light up green when the
headphones are switched on.
i
The operating duration of the headphones
with a set of batteries is up to 40 hours.
Basic functions
Using headphones
You can use the cordless headphones supplied
and/or up to two sets of corded headphones
connected to the corresponding jack of the rear-
compartment screens (
Y page 179).
Information on the cordless headphones
(
Y page 181).
Basic functions
183
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Using the main loudspeakers
This function is available in conjunction with the
multimedia system.
You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to listen to
a disc inserted in the rear-compartment drive.
To do so, disc mode (audio CD/audio DVD/
MP3) must be activated on at least one rear
screen.
The headphones' volume setting does not affect
the main loudspeakers.
X
To set on the multimedia system: press the
$ button, for example, to switch on an
audio mode.
X
To select Info6 slide and press the con-
troller.
A menu appears.
X
Turn the controller until Rear Seat Enter‐
tainment System: Audio is brought to the
front.
X
Press the controller.
Selecting sound settings
You can select sound settings in the following
operating modes:
R
Audio CD/MP3
R
Video DVD
R
Radio (active media source in COMAND)
R
AUX
X
Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio CD
mode) (
Y page 185).
X
Select Treble or Bass using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
An adjustment scale appears.
X
Select a setting using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Multiple users
Simultaneous use of the rear-compart-
ment disc drive
The two rear-compartment screens can be oper-
ated almost entirely independently from one
another. However, a conflict may occur in some
menus if the two screens are used simultane-
ously.
The following functions affect both screens:
R
changing playback options
R
selecting a track (from a track list or folder)
R
using the play, pause and stop functions
R
fast forward and rewind or scrolling
R
calling up the DVD menu and navigating
within it
R
setting the language, subtitles and camera
angle
R
calling up interactive DVD content
The following functions affect only one screen:
R
changing audio and video functions as well as
picture settings
R
switching between full screen and the menu
Switching between operating modes
When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio CD
mode), the current setting is saved. If you call up
this operating mode again later, there are two
possibilities:
R
the operating mode has been changed on the
other screen.
R
the operating mode has not been changed.
In the first case, the operating mode appears as
it is on the other screen.
In the second case, the setting appears on the
screen as it was when you last exited the oper-
ating mode.
Picture settings
Overview
You can select the picture settings in video DVD
and AUX mode (
Y page 194).
Adjusting the brightness, contrast and
color
X
Switch to video DVD mode (Y page 189).
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
184
Basic functions
Rear Seat Entertainment System
X
Select DVD-Video using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select Brightness, Contrast or Color
using the 9: buttons and press the 9
button to confirm.
A scale appears.
X
Select a setting using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select DVD-Video using the :=;
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of one of the menu items
16:9
, 4:3 or Zoom shows the currently set
picture format.
X
Select a format using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
System settings
Note
You can adjust all system settings individually
for each rear screen without affecting the other
screen.
Selecting the display language
X
Select System using the 9=; but-
tons on the remote control and press 9 to
confirm.
You see the system menu on the selected rear
screen.
X
Select Settings using the : button and
press 9 to confirm.
X
Confirm Language by pressing the 9 button.
The list of languages appears. The # dot indi-
cates the current setting.
X
Select a language using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System sets the
selected language.
Switching the display design
X
Select Settings using the : button and
press 9 to confirm.
X
Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic
with the 9: buttons and confirm with
the 9 button.
The dot indicates the current setting.
Design Explanation
Day Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to day design.
Night Mode
The display is set perma-
nently to night design.
Automatic
The display design
changes depending on
the vehicle instrument
cluster illumination.
Setting the brightness
X
Select Settings using the : button and
press 9 to confirm.
X
Select Brightness with the 9: but-
tons and confirm with the 9 button.
A scale appears.
X
Adjust the brightness using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
The bar moves up or down. The picture
becomes lighter or darker.
Showing/hiding the picture
X
To hide the picture: select Display Off in
the system menu with the :; buttons
on the remote control and confirm with the 9
button.
The picture is hidden.
X
To display the picture: press the 9 button.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
185
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
General notes
The rear-compartment drive is a single disc
drive.
Notes on audio mode can be found in the
"Media" section (
Y page 144):
R
Notes on CDs and DVDs
R
Notes on MP3 mode
R
Notes on copyright
Inserting and removing a CD/DVD
from the rear-compartment drive
:
Disc slot
;
Disc eject button
The rear-compartment drive is located behind
the center console in a folding compartment.
Depending on the vehicle equipment level, the
rear-compartment drive is located:
R
under the rear bench seat or
R
in the center console between the driver's
and front-passenger seats
If there is already a disc inserted, this must be
ejected before another is inserted.
X
To remove: press the þ button.
The rear-compartment drive ejects the disc.
X
To insert: insert a disc into the disc slot with
the printed side facing upwards.
The rear-compartment drive closes and the
disc is played.
The rear-compartment drive plays the disc:
R
if it has been inserted correctly and is a
permissible disc, and
R
after you have switched on disc mode
(audio CD or audio DVD or MP3 mode)
(
Y page 186).
Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded by
the drive. Loading may take some time,
depending on the number of folders and
tracks.
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or
MP3 mode
:
Calls up CD functions, other displays: MP3
(MP3 mode), DVD-A (audio DVD mode)
;
Calls up track list (audio CD and audio DVD
mode), calls up folders (MP3 mode)
=
Sets the treble
?
Sets the bass
The example shows audio CD mode. The num-
ber and the elapsed playback time for the cur-
rent track are displayed.
X
Insert a CD or DVD (Y page 186).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the inserted disc and plays it.
X
If the Rear Seat Entertainment System does
not play back the disc automatically, select
Disc
using the 9=; buttons on
the remote control and confirm with the 9
button.
The corresponding mode is switched on. The
Rear Seat Entertainment System plays the
disc.
i
Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in
the elapsed time shown being different from
the actual elapsed time.
186
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Selecting a track
Via skip function
X
Press the = or ; button on the remote
control.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
If the elapsed track time has passed 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the beginning
of the track. If the elapsed time is shorter, it
will skip to the start of the previous track.
If the Random Tracks
or Random Folder
playback option has been selected, the track
order is random.
Via track list
In audio CD mode, the track list contains all
tracks on the disc currently playing. In audio
DVD mode, the track list contains all tracks in
the currently active group.
In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks in
the currently active folder as well as the folder
structure, allowing you to select any track on the
MP3 CD.
X
Select Tracks (audio CD/DVD mode) or
Folder
(MP3 mode) using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control, and confirm by pressing the 9 but-
ton.
or
X
Press the 9 button when the selection win-
dow is active.
The track list appears. The # dot indicates the
current track.
X
Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
By entering the track number directly
X
Press the h button on the remote control.
The track entry display appears.
Example: track 2
X
Press the · button.
Example: track 23
X
Press the · and ¸ buttons in quick
succession.
X
Wait for approximately three seconds after
making the entry.
You will hear the track which has been
entered. The corresponding basic menu then
reappears.
i
It is not possible to enter numbers that
exceed the number of tracks on the CD or in
the currently active folder.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X
With the selection window active, press the
= or ; button on the remote control
repeatedly until you reach the desired posi-
tion.
or
X
Press and hold the E or F button until
the desired position has been reached.
Selecting a folder
This function is available in MP3 mode.
X
Select Folder in MP3 mode using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
or
X
Press the 9 button when the selection win-
dow is active.
The folder content appears.
X
To switch to the superordinate folder:
select symbol U using the 9: but-
tons on the remote control and press the 9
button to confirm.
The display shows the next folder up.
X
To select a folder: select a folder by pressing
the 9: button and confirm by pressing
the 9 button.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
X
Select a track using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The track is played and the selected folder is
now the active folder.
Pause function
This function is available in audio DVD mode.
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
187
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
X
To pause playback: press the 9 button in
full-screen mode.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
Select Ë using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and confirm with
the 9 button.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ì display changes to Ë.
Stop function
This function is available in audio DVD mode.
X
To interrupt playback: press the 9 button
in full-screen mode.
X
Select É using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and confirm with
the 9 button.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted.
X
To stop playback: while playback is inter-
rupted, select É again and press the 9
button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning
of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
X
To restart playback: select Ì and press
the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Setting the audio format
The content of an audio DVD can be divided into
up to 9 groups. The availability and type of group
depends on the respective DVD. A group can
contain music of different sound qualities
(stereo and multichannel formats, for example),
or bonus tracks.
X
In full-screen mode press the 9 button.
X
Select DVD-A using the :=; but-
tons on the remote control and press 9 to
confirm.
X
Select Group using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
The list of available audio formats appears.
The # dot indicates the format currently
selected.
X
Select an audio format using the 9:
buttons and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
To exit the menu: press the = or ;
button.
Playback options
X
Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using
the :=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
A list appears. The # dot indicates the play-
back option currently selected.
X
Select Normal Track Sequence, Random
Tracks or Random Folder using the
9: buttons and press the 9 button to
confirm.
The option is switched on. For all options
except Normal Track Sequence
, you will
see a corresponding display in the selection
window.
i
If you switch the data carrier which you are
currently listening to, the Normal Track
Sequence option is activated automatically. If
an option is selected, it remains selected after
the Rear Seat Entertainment System is
switched on or off.
Switching track information on/off
(MP3 mode only)
If the function is switched on, folder and track
names are displayed.
If the function is switched off, disc and file
names are displayed.
X
Select MP3 using the :=; buttons
on the remote control and press the 9 button
to confirm.
X
Select Display Track Information using
the 9: buttons and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
The function is switched on O or off ª,
depending on the previous status.
188
Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Video DVD mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The CD/DVD drive is a class 1 laser product.
If you open the housing of the CD/DVD drive,
there is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
radiation. This laser radiation could damage
your retina. There is a risk of injury.
Never open the housing. Always have main-
tenance and repair work carried out at a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
General notes
DVD playback conditions
Playback problems may occur when playing
copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,
DVD authoring software, writing software and
writers available. This variety means that there
is no guarantee that the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System will be able to play DVD videos that
you have copied yourself.
Further information (
Y page 159). Information
regarding the multimedia system also applies to
the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
Function restrictions
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that certain
functions or actions described in this section
will be temporarily blocked or may not function
at all. As soon as you try to activate these func-
tions or actions, you will see the K symbol in
the display.
Switching on video DVD mode
X
Insert a video DVD (Y page 186).
The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads
the disc.
If disc mode was the last mode selected, it will
now be active.
If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as
described in the following instructions.
X
Select Disc in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote con-
trol and confirm by pressing the 9 button.
If the DVD video fulfills the playback criteria,
the film either starts automatically or the
menu saved on the DVD appears. If the DVD
menu appears, you must start the film man-
ually.
X
Select the corresponding menu item in the
DVD menu.
A submenu is displayed. If available, addi-
tional options can now be selected.
Showing/hiding the control menu
:
Type of data medium
;
Current title
=
Current scene
?
Track time
A
Displays the menu
X
To show: press the 9 or : button on
the remote control.
X
To hide: press the 9 or : button.
or
X
Wait about eight seconds.
Video DVD mode
189
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Showing/hiding the menu
:
Video DVD options
;
Pause function
=
Stop function
?
Sets the treble
A
Sets the bass
X
To show: press the 9 button on the remote
control.
X
To hide: press the 9 button and confirm
# by pressing the 9 button.
Fast forwarding/rewinding
X
Press and hold the E or F button on
the remote control until the desired position
has been reached.
You see the control menu.
Pause function
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
To pause playback: select Ë and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The menu is hidden.
Stop function
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
To interrupt playback: select É and
press the 9 button to confirm.
The Ë display changes to Ì. The video
image is hidden.
X
To continue playback: select Ì and
press the 9 button to confirm.
Playback continues from the point where it
was interrupted. The menu is hidden.
X
To stop playback: while playback is inter-
rupted, select É again and press the 9
button to confirm.
Playback stops and returns to the beginning
of the DVD. Ì is highlighted.
X
To restart playback: select Ì and press
the 9 button to confirm.
Playback starts from the beginning of the
DVD.
Selecting a scene/chapter
Skipping forward/back
X
Press the = or ; button on the remote
control.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The navigation menu (
Y page 189) appears
for approximately eight seconds.
Selecting a scene/chapter directly
The examples illustrate how to select scene or
chapter 5.
X
Option 1: while the film is playing, press the
h button on the remote control.
X
Press a button, such as ¿.
X
Option 2: press the 9 button on the remote
control.
X
Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Select Scene Selection and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Select 5 using the 9 or : button and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, playback will begin from the 5th
scene or chapter after a brief pause.
190
Video DVD mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Selecting a film/track
X
Option 1: press the 9 button on the remote
control.
X
Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X
Select DVD functions and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Select Title selection and press the 9
button to confirm.
X
Press the 9 button to select the list.
X
Select a film or a title.
X
Option 2: to select film 2, for example, press
the · button on the remote control.
After a brief pause, the second film is played.
DVD menu
Calling up the DVD menu
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
itself. It is structured in various ways according
to the individual DVD and permits various
actions and settings.
In the case of multi-language DVDs, for example,
you can change the DVD language in the DVD
menu.
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Select Menu and press the 9 button to con-
firm.
The DVD menu appears.
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
X
Select a menu item using the
9:=; buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to confirm.
A menu appears.
X
Confirm Select by pressing the 9 button.
A submenu is displayed.
X
If available, additional options can now be
selected.
The Rear Seat Entertainment System then
switches back to the DVD menu.
i
Menu items which cannot be selected are
shown in gray.
i
Depending on the DVD, the menu items
Back (to movie)
, Play, Stop, E, F
or Go
Up may not function at all or not at cer-
tain points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,
the K symbol appears in the display.
Stopping a film or skipping to the begin-
ning or end of a scene
X
Select any menu item from the DVD menu.
The menu appears.
X
To stop the film: select the Stop menu item
and press the 9 button on the remote control
to confirm.
X
To skip to the end of a scene: select the
F menu item and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X
To skip to the beginning of a scene: select
the E menu item and press the 9 button
to confirm.
Moving up one level in the DVD menu
X
Call up the DVD menu.
X
Press the % back button on the remote
control or select the corresponding menu
item in the DVD menu.
or
X
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press the 9 remote control button to con-
firm.
X
Select Go Up and press W to confirm.
Back to the movie
X
Press the % back button repeatedly until
you see the film.
or
X
Select any menu item in the DVD menu and
press the 9 remote control button to con-
firm.
X
Select the Back (to movie) menu item in
the menu and press the 9 button to confirm.
Setting the audio format
You can use this function to set the audio lan-
guage or the audio format. The number of set-
Video DVD mode
191
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
tings is determined by the DVD content. It may
also be possible to access the settings from the
DVD menu. This function is not available on all
DVDs.
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Select Audio Language and press the 9
button to confirm.
A menu appears after a short while. The # dot
indicates the currently set language.
X
Select a language using the 9: but-
tons and press the 9 button to confirm.
Subtitles and camera angle
These functions are not available on all DVDs.
The number of subtitle languages and camera
angles available depends on the content of the
DVD. It may also be possible to access the set-
tings from the DVD menu.
X
To show the menu: press the 9 button on
the remote control.
X
Select DVD-Video and press the 9 button on
the remote control to confirm.
X
Select DVD Functions and press the 9 but-
ton to confirm.
X
Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and
press the 9 button to confirm.
In both cases, a menu appears after a few
seconds. The # dot indicates the current set-
ting.
X
Select a setting using the 9: buttons
and press the 9 button to confirm.
Interactive content
DVDs can also contain interactive content (e.g.
a video game). In a video game, you may be able
to influence events, for example, by selecting
and triggering actions. The type and number of
actions depend on the DVD.
X
Select an action using the
9;:= buttons on the remote
control and press the 9 button to execute it.
A menu appears and the first entry, Select
, is
highlighted.
X
Press the 9 button.
Active COMAND media source mode
Overview
You can transfer a media source selected in the
multimedia system to the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System. If you switch the media source in
the multimedia system, this will not be transfer-
red to the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
You can transfer these media sources to the
Rear Seat Entertainment System:
R
Radio
R
CD or MP3 mode (CD, SD card, USB)
R
Media Interface
R
Video DVD mode
Follow the sequence described below when
playing a media source from the multimedia
system on the Rear Seat Entertainment System.
1. Switching on the function in the
multimedia system
X
Switch on the radio (Y page 134).
X
Switch CD or MP3 mode on (CD, SD card,
USB) (
Y page 143).
X
Switch on the media interface (Y page 157).
X
Switch to video DVD mode (Y page 160).
192
Active COMAND media source mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
2. Transferring the active media
source to the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment System
X
To select the Options menu, turn and press
the controller.
X
Select Active Aud./Vid. Source for
Rear by pressing the controller.
The # dot indicates that the function is acti-
vated.
X
To switch off the function: select Rear
Off (Radio) or Rear Off (Media).
The # dot indicates that the function is deac-
tivated.
3. Loading the active media source to
the Rear Seat Entertainment System
X
Select COMAND using the 9=; but-
tons on the remote control and press 9 to
confirm.
A message appears stating that the desired
audio or video source needs to be activated in
the multimedia system. If the media source is
activated in the multimedia system, it is loa-
ded on the Rear Seat Entertainment System
and is then played.
If Rear Off
is activated in the multimedia sys-
tem, the COMAND is off or there is no
active COMAND source. message appears.
Radio mode functions
X
To select a station: press the = or ;
button.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The radio selects the previous or next station
in the alphabetical station list.
DAB stations are displayed first, followed by
stations with available station names. Sta-
tions showing station frequency are shown
last.
Additional setting option:
X
Adjust the sound settings (Y page 184).
Audio CD mode functions
X
To select by skipping to a track: press the
= or ; button.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
If more than 8 seconds of track time have
elapsed, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the track.
If less than 8 seconds of track time have
elapsed, the function skips back to the begin-
ning of the previous track.
Additional setting option:
X
Adjust the sound settings (Y page 184).
Audio DVD mode functions
X
To skip to the next or previous group:
press the : button on the remote control.
X
To select KL, highlight using the =
or ; button and press 9.
Active COMAND media source mode
193
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
Additional setting option:
X
Adjust the sound settings (Y page 184).
MP3 mode functions
X
To select a track by skipping to a track:
press the = or ; button on the remote
control.
or
X
Press the E or F button.
The skip forward function skips to the next
track.
If the elapsed track time has exceeded 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the beginning
of the track.
If the elapsed track time is less than 8 sec-
onds, the function skips back to the beginning
of the previous track.
Additional setting option:
X
Adjust the sound settings (Y page 184).
DVD video mode functions
To hide the menu:
X
Press the 9 or : button on the remote
control.
or
X
Wait about eight seconds.
The menu is hidden.
Additional setting options:
X
Adjust the brightness, contrast and color
(
Y page 184).
X
Change the picture format (Y page 185).
X
Adjust the sound settings (Y page 184).
AUX mode
Introduction
You can connect external video sources with a
sound and video signal to the Rear Seat Enter-
tainment System:
R
one external video source to each of the rear
screens (AUX display)
R
one external video source to the rear-com-
partment disc drive (AUX drive)
Operating the external video source; see the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
For further details about external video sources,
please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Connecting AUX equipment
AUX drive jacks
The AUX drive jacks are located on the rear-
compartment drive to the right of the þ
(
Y page 181) button.
AUX display jacks
The AUX display jacks are on the side of the two
rear screens (
Y page 179).
Connecting audio and video cables
X
Insert the audio plugs for the left and right
signals into the corresponding L and R jacks.
X
Insert the video plug into the V jack.
Activating AUX mode
AUX drive
Requirements: the external video source is con-
nected to the rear-compartment drive and play-
back is selected.
X
Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote con-
trol and press the 9 button to confirm.
The AUX menu appears.
X
Select Source from the AUX menu and press
the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select Disc drive Aux and press the 9
button to confirm.
Playback starts. If an external video source
does not provide a video picture, an audio
menu appears.
Displaying AUX
Requirements: the external video source is con-
nected to the rear-compartment screen and
playback is selected.
X
Select a screen using the thumbwheel on the
remote control (
Y page 180) until "L REAR"
194
AUX mode
Rear Seat Entertainment System
(left-hand screen) or "R REAR" (right-hand
screen) is highlighted in the window.
X
Select Aux in the menu using the
9=; buttons on the remote con-
trol and press the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select Source from the AUX menu and press
the 9 button to confirm.
X
Select Display Aux and press the 9 button
to confirm.
Playback starts. If an external video source
does not provide a video picture, an audio
menu appears.
Adjusting treble and bass
X
Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu and
press the 9 button on the remote control to
confirm.
A scale appears.
X
Select a setting using the 9 or : but-
ton and press the 9 button to confirm.
Adjusting the brightness, contrast or
color
X
Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in
the AUX menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X
Select Brightness, Contrast or Color and
press the 9 button to confirm.
A scale appears.
X
Select a setting using the 9 or : but-
ton and press the 9 button to confirm.
Changing the picture format
X
Select Display Aux or Disc drive Aux in
the AUX menu and press the 9 button to
confirm.
X
Select Automatic, 16:9 optimize, 4:3 or
Zoom
using the 9: buttons and press
the 9 button to confirm.
The dot in front of the menu item indicates the
currently selected picture format.
AUX mode
195
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Z
196
22


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Mercedes G-Class 2017 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Mercedes G-Class 2017 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 4,75 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Mercedes G-Class 2017

Mercedes G-Class 2017 User Manual - English - 286 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info